MINI COUNTRYMAN. OWNER'S MANUAL....Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. For Your Own Safety Manufacturer

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI COUNTRYMAN.

LINK:CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402723835 - VI/18


WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL.MINI COUNTRYMAN.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will haveon the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use theIntegrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important informationon vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical featuresavailable in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed toenhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your MINI.Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix ofthe printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

3Online Edition for Part no. 01402723835 - VI/18

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTESInformation.............................................................................................................................. 8

QUICK REFERENCEYour MINI at a glance........................................................................................................ 20

AT A GLANCECockpit.................................................................................................................................... 38

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................42

Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 51

General settings................................................................................................................... 54

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................66

CONTROLSOpening and closing........................................................................................................... 70

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................94

Transporting children safely..........................................................................................107

Driving..................................................................................................................................112

Displays................................................................................................................................ 137

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 157

Safety.....................................................................................................................................163

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................184

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 189

Climate control...................................................................................................................209

Interior equipment............................................................................................................218

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................225

Cargo area............................................................................................................................228


DRIVING TIPSThings to remember when driving.............................................................................. 238

Saving fuel...........................................................................................................................243

MOBILITYRefueling..............................................................................................................................252

Fuel........................................................................................................................................254

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................256

Engine compartment........................................................................................................276

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................279

Coolant..................................................................................................................................283

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 285

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 287

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 298

Care........................................................................................................................................306

REFERENCETechnical data.................................................................................................................... 314

Appendix..............................................................................................................................317

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................318

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.US English ID5 VI/18, 07 18 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up viathe Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.


6


NOTES

Information ................................................................................................... 8


Information

Using this Owner's Manual

OrientationThe fastest way to find information on aparticular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineDue to updates after the editorial deadline,differences may exist between the printedOwner's Manual and the Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual forthe vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationThe Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as printed book from the service cen-ter.

The topics are also discussed in theIntegrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa-tion

Dealer’s service centerA dealer’s service center will be glad to an-swer questions at any time.

InternetThe Owner's Manual and general Informa-tion about MINI, for example on technology,

are available on the Internet: www.mini-usa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in thevehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual specificallydescribes features and functions found inthe vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manualcan be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-ditional information, refer to page 66.

MINI Motorer’s Guide appThe app specifically describes features andfunctions found in the vehicle. The app canbe displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Driver’s Guide WebDriver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-ble information for the selected vehicle. Ifpossible, only equipment and functions thatare actually installed in the vehicle will beexplained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must befollowed in order to avoid thepossibility of injury to yourselfand to others as well as seriousdamage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment.

Seite 8

NOTES Information


Symbol Meaning

"..." Control Display texts used toselect individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use withthe voice activation system..

››...‹‹ Responses generated by thevoice activation system.

Action stepsAction steps to be carried out are presentedas numbered list. The steps must be carriedout in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

EnumerationsEnumerations without mandatory order oralternative possibilities are presented as listwith bullet points.

– First possibility.

– Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on thecomponent is available in the Owner'sManual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all modelsand all standard, country-specific and op-tional equipment that is offered in themodel series. Therefore, this Owner'sManual also describes and illustrates fea-tures and functions that are not available ina vehicle, for example because of the se-lected optional features or the country-spe-cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functionsand systems.

When using these functions and systems,the applicable laws and regulations must beobserved.

For any options and equipment not descri-bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to theSupplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-swer any questions that you may haveabout the features and options applicable toyour vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con-ceived to ensure that our vehicles continueto embody the highest quality and safetystandards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-tures described in this Owner's Manual maydiffer from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineDue to updates after the editorial deadline,differences may exist between the printedOwner's Manual and the Integrated Owner'sManual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual forthe vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

ManufacturerThe manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,BMW AG.

Seite 9

Information NOTES


Intended useFollow the following when using the vehi-cle:

– Owner's Manual.

– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-move stickers.

– Technical vehicle data.

– The traffic, speed, and safety laws wherethe vehicle is driven.

– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-ments.

WarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured forthe operating conditions and registrationrequirements applying in the country offirst delivery, also known as homologation.If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-ent country it might be necessary to adaptyour vehicle to potentially differing operat-ing conditions and registration require-ments. If your vehicle does not comply withthe homologation requirements in a certaincountry you may not be able to lodge war-ranty claims for your vehicle there. Furtherinformation on warranty is available from adealer’s service center.

Maintenance and repairs

WARNING

Improperly performed work on the vehiclepaint can lead to a failure or malfunctionof the radar sensors and thereby result in asafety risk. There is a risk of accidents orrisk of damage to property. Have paint-work or paintwork repairs on bumpers ofvehicles with radar sensors performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop only.

Advanced technology, e. g. the use of mod-ern materials and high-performance elec-

tronics, requires suitable maintenance andrepair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that you entrust corresponding pro-cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. Ifyou choose to use another service facility,the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends use of a facility that performs work,for instance maintenance and repair, ac-cording to MINI specifications with prop-erly trained personnel, referred to in thisOwner's Manual as "another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in-stance maintenance and repair, there is arisk of subsequent damage and relatedsafety risks.

Parts and accessoriesThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends the use of parts and accessory prod-ucts approved by the manufacturer of theMINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and adviceon their use and installation are availablefrom a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested bythe manufacturer of the MINI for theirsafety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrantsgenuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does notevaluate whether each individual productfrom another manufacturer can be usedwith MINI vehicles without presenting asafety hazard, even if a country-specific of-ficial approval was issued. The manufac-turer of your vehicle does not evaluatewhether these products are suitable forMINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia law requires vehicle manufactur-ers provide the following warning:

Seite 10

NOTES Information


WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-tomobile components and parts, includingcomponents found in the interior furnish-ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-cals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects and repro-ductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain productsof component wear contain or emit chemi-cals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other re-productive harm. Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain lead andlead compounds. Batteries also containother chemicals known to the State of Cali-fornia to cause cancer. Wash your handsafter handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in labo-ratory animals. Always protect your skinby washing thoroughly with soap and wa-ter. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-hicle.

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining apassenger vehicle or off-highway motorvehicle can expose you to chemicals in-cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known tothe State of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-haust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or washyour hands frequently when servicingyour vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-hicle.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publica-tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered bythe following warranties:

– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

– Federal Emissions System Defect War-ranty.

– Federal Emissions Performance War-ranty.

– California Emission Control System Lim-ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warrantiesis listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US models or in the War-ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adaptedand designed to meet the particular operat-ing conditions and homologation require-ments in your country and continental re-gion in order to deliver the full drivingpleasure while the vehicle is operated underthose conditions. If you wish to operateyour vehicle in another country or region,you may be required to adapt your vehicleto meet different prevailing operating con-ditions and homologation requirements.You should also be aware of any applicablewarranty limitations or exclusions for suchcountry or region. In such case, please con-tact Customer Relations for further informa-tion.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustainthe road safety, operational reliability andthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenancemeasures:

– MINI Maintenance system.

Seite 11

Information NOTES


– Service and Warranty Information Book-let for US models.

– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in se-rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage isnot covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty.

Data memory

General informationElectronic control devices are installed inthe vehicle. Electronic control units processdata they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Somecontrol units are necessary for the vehicleto function safely or provide assistance dur-ing driving, for instance driver assistancesystems. Furthermore, control devices facil-itate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged datacan be requested from the manufacturer ofthe vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-ple.

Personal referenceEach vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-cle identification number. Depending on thecountry, the vehicle owner can be identifiedwith the vehicle identification number, li-cense plate and corresponding authorities.In addition, there are other options to trackdata collected in the vehicle to the driver orvehicle owner, e.g. via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicleControl units process data to operate the ve-hicle.

For example, this includes:

– Status messages for the vehicle and itsindividual components, e.g., wheel rota-tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,transverse acceleration, engaged safetybelt indicator.

– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in thevehicle itself and generally volatile. Thedata is not stored beyond the operating pe-riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control unitsand ignition keys, contain components forstoring technical information. Informationabout the vehicle condition, component us-age, maintenance requirements or faultscan be stored temporarily or permanently.

This information generally records the stateof a component, a module, a system, or theenvironment, for instance:

– Operating states of system components,e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure,battery status.

– Malfunctions and faults in importantsystem components, for instance lightsand brakes.

– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-uations such as airbag deployment orengagement of the driving stability con-trol systems.

– Information on vehicle-damagingevents.

The data is required to perform the controldevice functions. Furthermore, it alsoserves to recognize and correct malfunc-tions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer tooptimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is transient and isonly processed within the vehicle itself.Only a small share of the data is storedevent-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs,service processes, warranty cases, and qual-

Seite 12

NOTES Information


ity assurance measures, this technical infor-mation can be read out from the vehicle to-gether with the vehicle identificationnumber.

A dealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop can readout the information. The socket for OBD On-board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and usedby the relevant organizations in the servicenetwork. The data documents technical con-ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-fication of the fault, compliance with war-ranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has productmonitoring duties to meet in line with prod-uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, thevehicle manufacturer needs technical datafrom the vehicle. The data from the vehiclecan also be used to check customer claimsfor warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle canbe reset when a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer intothe vehicle

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, com-fort and individual settings can be stored inthe vehicle and modified or reset at anytime.

For example, this includes:

– Settings for the seat and steering wheelpositions.

– Suspension and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to theentertainment and communication systemof the vehicle, e.g. via smartphone.

This includes the following depending onthe respective equipment:

– Multimedia data such as music, films orphotos for playback in an integratedmultimedia system.

– Address book data for use in conjunc-tion with an integrated hands-free sys-tem or an integrated navigation system.

– Entered navigation destinations.

– Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicleor is found on a device that has been con-nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,USB stick or MP3 player. If this data isstored in the vehicle, it can be deleted atany time.

This data is only transmitted to third partiesupon personal request as part of the use ofonline services. This depends on the se-lected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile end devicesDepending on the vehicle equipment, mo-bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-stance smartphones, can be controlled viathe vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile de-vice can be played back and displayedthrough the multimedia system. Certain in-formation is transferred to the mobile de-vice at the same time. Depending on thetype of incorporation, this includes, for in-stance position data and other general vehi-cle information. This optimizes the way inwhich selected apps, for instance navigationor music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between themobile device and the vehicle, for instanceactive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further isdetermined by the provider of the particularapp being used. The extent of the possible

Seite 13

Information NOTES


settings depends on the respective app andthe operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General informationIf the vehicle has a wireless network con-nection, this enables data to be exchangedbetween the vehicle and other systems. Thewireless network connection is realized viaan in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unitor via personal mobile devices brought intothe vehicle, for instance smartphones. Thiswireless network connection enables 'onlinefunctions' to be used. These include onlineservices and apps supplied by the vehiclemanufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehiclemanufacturerWhere online services from the vehiclemanufacturer are concerned, the corre-sponding functions are described in the ap-propriate place, for instance the Owner'sManual or manufacturer's website. The rele-vant legal information pertaining to dataprotection is provided there too. Personaldata may be used to perform online serv-ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-nection, for instance with the IT systems ofthe vehicle manufacturer intended for thispurpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per-sonal data above and beyond that needed toprovide the services must always be basedon a legal permission, contractual arrange-ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-vate or deactivate the data connection as awhole. That is, with the exception of func-tions and services required by law such asAssist systems.

Services from other providersWhen using online services from other pro-viders, these services are the responsibility

of the relevant provider and subject to theirdata privacy conditions and terms of use.The vehicle manufacturer has no influenceon the content exchanged during this proc-ess. Information on the way in which per-sonal data is collected and used in relationto services from third parties, the scope ofsuch data, and its purpose, can be obtainedfrom the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR is designed torecord data related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:

– How various systems in your vehiclewere operating.

– Whether or not the driver and passen-ger safety belts were fastened.

– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

– How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only ifa nontrivial crash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the EDR under normal driv-ing conditions and no personal data, for in-stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, could combine the EDR data with the

Seite 14

NOTES Information


type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the ve-hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties,such as law enforcement, that have the spe-cial equipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can befound in the engine compartment, on theright-hand side of the vehicle.

Type label

The vehicle identification number can befound on the type label, on the right-handside of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can alsobe found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customersThe following only applies to vehiclesowned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause in-jury or death, you should immediately in-form the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration NHTSA, in addition to noti-fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, yourdealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

Seite 15

Information NOTES


other information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada,Defect Investigations and Recalls, may callthe toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. Youcan also obtain other information about mo-tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 16

NOTES Information


Seite 17

Information NOTES


18


QUICK REFERENCE

Your MINI at a glance ............................................................................ 20


Your MINI at a glance

Opening and closing

Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: openthe tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehiclePress button on the remote control.

Depending on the settings, either only thedriver's door or all vehicle access points areunlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, pressthe button of the remote control again tounlock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold this button on theremote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the remotecontrol is pressed.

Locking the vehiclePress button on the remote control.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central lockingsystem

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi-cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve-hicle.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote controland hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance


Comfort Access

ConceptThe vehicle can be accessed without acti-vating the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remotecontrol with you, such as in your pantspocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the re-mote control when it is in close proximityor in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's doorhandle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's doorhandle, press the button.

Opening and closing the tailgate withno-touch activation

Concept

The tailgate can be opened and closed withno-touch activation using the remote con-trol you are carrying.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicleat approx. one arm's length away fromthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-rection of travel and immediately pull itback.

Tailgate

Opening

Unlock the vehicle and press the button onthe tailgate.

– Unlock the vehicle and press the buttonon the tailgate.

Seite 21

Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE


– If carrying the remote control, press thebutton on the tailgate.

– Press and hold button on the re-mote control for approx. 1 sec-ond.

Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked.

Closing

Press button on the inside of the tailgate.

– Press button, arrow 1, on the inside ofthe tailgate.

– Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closingthe tailgate. The driver's door must beclosed for this purpose and the remotecontrol must be outside of the vehicle inthe area of the tailgate.

Seats, mirrors, and steeringwheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Seite 22



Adjusting the head restraint

Height

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, andpush the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Settings

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-itor

3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seatingposition.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

ConceptThe following settings can be stored and, ifnecessary, retrieved using the memoryfunction:

– Seat position.

– Exterior mirror position.

– Height of the Head-up Display.

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press button. The LED in thebutton lights up.

4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on theseat while the LED is illuminated. TheLED goes out.

Calling up settingsThe stored position is called up automati-cally.

Seite 23



Press selected button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a switch for set-ting the seat or one of the memory buttonsis pressed.

While driving, the seat position adjustmenton the driver's side is interrupted after ashort time.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steeringwheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Washer/wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument clusterThe indicator/warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily whenthe engine is started or the ignition isswitched on.

Driver's door

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

ConceptThe Central Information Display (CID) com-bines the functions of a multitude ofswitches. These functions can be operatedvia the Controller or touchscreen.

Seite 24



Controller

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: call up main menu.

Press twice: open recently usedmenus.

Open the Communication menu.

Open the Media/Radio menu.

Open destination input menu fornavigation.

Open navigation map.

Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

Voice activation

Using the voice activation system

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol in the instrument clusterindicates that the voice activation system isactive.

If no other commands are available, operatethe function via the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Help on the voice activation system

– To have information on the operatingprinciple of the voice activation systemread out loud: ›General information onvoice control‹.

– To have help for the current menu readout loud: ›Help‹.

Information on Emergency RequestsDo not use the voice activation system toinitiate an Emergency Request. In stressfulsituations, the voice and vocal pitch canchange. This can unnecessarily delay the es-tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button close to the in-terior mirror.

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

– On: press the Start/Stopbutton.

Most of the indicator/warning lights light up fora varied length of time.

– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

– Radio-ready state: when the ignition isswitched off, press the ON/OFF buttonon the radio or when the engine is run-ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Seite 25



Some electronic systems/power con-sumers remain ready for operation.

Starting/stopping the engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting


2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift toneutral.


Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, applythe parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.


Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, pressthe Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the en-gine off automatically while stationary tosave fuel. The engine starts automaticallywhen the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engineoff automatically while stationary to savefuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-pressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

SettingPull the switch.

The LED and indicator light light up.

ReleasingManual transmission: press the switchwhile the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switchwhile the brake is pressed or selector leverposition P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Manual transmission

ShiftingWhen shifting into 5th or 6th gear, pushthe gearshift lever to the right in order toprevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or4th gear.

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and en-gage reverse gear with a forward shiftingmovement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positionsParking position P.

Reverse R.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R onlywhen the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode or reverse, maintain

Seite 26



pressure on the brake pedal until you areready to start.

Selector lever lockA lock prevents an inadvertent change fromselector lever position P to another selectorlever position and, depending on the trans-mission version, inadvertent switching toselector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-pressed, press the button on the front orside of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport andmanual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left out of se-lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

– To shift down: press the selector leverforward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-wards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turnsignal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the lowbeams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-row 2.

Turn signal

– On: press the lever past the resistancepoint.

– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-ance point.

– Off: press the lever past the resistancepoint in the opposite direction.

– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tapthe lever up or down.

– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-sistance point and hold it there for aslong as you want the turn signal to flash.

Seite 27



Canada: roadside parking light

Illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the ignition switched off, pressthe lever either up or down past the re-sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Washer/wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired positionis reached.

– Resting position of the wipers: posi-tion 0.

– Rain sensor: position 1.

– Normal wiper speed: position 2.

– Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down untilit reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down fromthe standard position.

Seite 28



Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from itsstandard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into thestandard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or taponce beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off


– To switch off fast wipe: press downtwice.

– To switch off normal wipe: press downonce.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

Seite 29



Rain sensor


Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rainsensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.


Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Control the air flow, manual.

Control the manual air dis-tribution.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Seite 30



Button Function

Recirculated-air mode.

Automatic recirculated-aircontrol AUC/recirculated-air mode.

Control the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrost and defog the win-dows.

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Change waveband

2 Changing the entertainment source

3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Change station/track

5 Programmable memory buttons

Navigation destination entry

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. "State/Province?"

4. Move the Controller to the right to se-lect the state from the list.

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further witheach entry.

3. Select the symbol.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.


9. Select a house number or range of housenumbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance"Start guidance"

If only the town/city was entered: destina-tion guidance is started to the town/citycenter.

Seite 31



Pairing the mobile phoneAfter the mobile phone is paired once withthe vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-ated using the Central Information Display(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle isdisplayed on the Control Display.

5. Select the functions for which the mo-bile phone is to be used.

6. To perform additional steps on the mo-bile phone, refer to the mobile phoneowner's manual: e.g., search for or con-nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-vice.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-pears on the mobile phone display. Se-lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-trol number is displayed or the controlnumber must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-played on the Control Display withthe control number on the display ofthe device.

Confirm the control number on thedevice and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same controlnumber on the device and via theCentral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayedin the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap-pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a callIncoming call can be accepted via the Cen-tral Information Display (CID) or the buttonon the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel toselect: "Accept"

Dialing a number1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.


If connection is to be set up via the addi-tional phone:

1. Press button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

ConceptCarPlay allows certain functions of a com-patible Apple iPhone to be used via Sirivoice operation and the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Functional requirements– Compatible iPhone.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

Seite 32



– Corresponding mobile wireless contract.

– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-tion are switched on on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing iPhone with CarPlayPair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle anddisplayed in the device list.

Refueling

Refueling

Fuel cap1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap

to open it.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-tached to the fuel filler flap.

GasolineFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfurcontent.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline withoutmetallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel gradecan be found in the Owner's Manual.

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can befound on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressureRegularly check the tire inflation pressureand correct it as needed:

– At least twice a month.

– Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflationpressureReinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Seite 33



Electronic oil measurement

RequirementsA current measured value is available afterapprox. 30 minutes of driving. During ashorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General informationSwitch off the ignition and safely park thevehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding

Only add engine oil when the message isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in themessage.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-play.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside AssistanceThis service can be reached around theclock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, ifneeded. Select to dial the telephonenumber on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 34



Seite 35



36


AT A GLANCE

Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 38Central Information Display (CID) ...................................................... 42Voice activation system ......................................................................... 51General settings ....................................................................................... 54Owner's Manual media ........................................................................... 66


Cockpit


This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered withthe series. It also describes features that arenot necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or countryversions. This also applies to safety-relatedfunctions and systems. When using thesefunctions and systems, the applicable lawsand regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 89

2 Exterior mirror operation 103

3 Buttons of the central locking sys-tem 75

4 Lights

Front fog lights 160

Light switch 157

Lights off

Daytime running lights 159

Parking lights 157

Low beams 157

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Cockpit


Automatic headlight con-trol 158

Cornering light 159

High-beam Assistant 159Instrument lighting 161

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise controlon/off 189

Cruise control on/off 196

Cruise control: store speed

Pausing, continuing cruisecontrol

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control:reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control:increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 119

High beams, head-light flasher 119

High-beam Assistant 159

Canada: roadside parkinglight 158

Onboard Computer 147

7 Instrument cluster 137

8 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers 123

Rain sensor 124

Cleaning windows 121

Rear window wiper 122

Clean the rear window 122

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice activation 51

Telephone

Confirm the selection 147

Move selection up 147

Move selection down 147

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

Seite 39

Cockpit AT A GLANCE


11 Adjust the steering wheel 105

12 Unlock hood 277

13 Operate the tailgate 80

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 298

Intelligent Safety 174

2 Control Display 42

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 225

5 Climate control 209

6 PDC Park Distance Con-trol 198

Rearview camera 201

Parking assistant 204Auto Start/Stop func-tion 115

Start/stop the engine andswitch the ignition on/off 112DSC Dynamic Stability Control 184

MINI Driving Modesswitch 186

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Cockpit


7 Steptronic transmission selectorlever 128

Manual transmission selectorlever 127

8 Controller with buttons 45

Controller with buttons 45

9 Parking brake 117

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request,SOS 299

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-senger airbag 166

3 Reading lights 161

4 Ambient light 161

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 91

6 Interior lights 161

Seite 41

Cockpit AT A GLANCE


Central Information Display (CID)


This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered withthe series. It also describes features that arenot necessarily available in your vehicle,e. g., due to the selected options or countryversions. This also applies to safety-relatedfunctions and systems. When using thesefunctions and systems, the applicable lawsand regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-bines the functions of a multitude ofswitches. These functions can be operatedvia the Controller or touchscreen.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating the integrated information sys-tems and communication devices whiledriving can distract from traffic. It is pos-sible to lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident. Only use the systemsor devices when the traffic situation al-lows. As warranted, stop and use the sys-tems and devices while the vehicle is sta-tionary.

Input and display

Letters and numbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be-tween entering upper and lower case lettersand numbers:

Symbol Function

or

Change between capital andlower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice activation.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparisonWhen entering names and addresses, thechoice is narrowed down with every letterentered and letters may be added automati-cally.

Entries are continuously compared withdata stored in the vehicle.

– Only those letters are offered during en-try for which data is available.

– Destination search: place names can beentered in all languages that are availa-ble on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating thefunctionsSeveral menu items are preceded by acheckbox. The checkbox indicates whetherthe function is activated or deactivated. Se-lecting the menu item activates or deacti-vates the function.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)


Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General informationThe status field can be found in the upperarea of the Control Display. Status informa-tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being re-ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net-work.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has beenswitched off.

Encrypted connection not ac-tive.

Request for the current vehicleposition.

Checking the current vehicle po-sition.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed onthe right side of the split screen, for in-stance information from the Onboard Com-puter.

In the divided screen view, the so-calledsplit screen, this information remains visi-ble even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

1. Press button.

2. "Split screen"

Seite 43

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE


Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus,where the split screen is supported.

1. Move the Controller to the right untilthe split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of dis-plays.

1. Move the Controller to the right untilthe split screen is selected.


3. "Personalize menu"


5. Move the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons and, dependingon the equipment version, with touch-pad

Control Display

General informationTo clean the Control Display, follow the careinstructions, refer to page 310.

In the case of very high temperatures onthe Control Display, for instance due to in-tense solar radiation, the brightness may bereduced down to complete deactivation.Once the temperature is reduced, for in-stance through shade or air conditioning,the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con-trol Display can shift and damage the Con-trol Display. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not place objects in the areain front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automaticallyThe Control Display is switched on automat-ically after unlocking.

In certain situations, the Control Display isswitched off automatically, for instance ifno operation is performed on the vehicle forseveral minutes.

Switching on/off manuallyThe Control Display can also be switched offmanually.

1. Press button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on theController to switch it back on again.

Seite 44



Controller with navigation system

General informationThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Some functions of the Central InformationDisplay (CID) can be operated using thetouchpad on the Controller, refer topage 49:

Operation– Turn.

– Press.

– Move in four directions.


Button Function





Open destination input menu fornavigation.

Open navigation map.



Controller without navigationsystem

General informationThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to se-lect menu items and enter the settings.

Some functions of the Central InformationDisplay (CID) can be operated using thetouchpad on the Controller, refer topage 49:

Operation– Turn.

Seite 45



– Press.

– Move in two directions.


Button Function





Button Function



Operating with the Controller

Opening the main menuPress the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desiredmenu item is highlighted.


Seite 46



Changing between displaysAfter a menu item is selected, for instance"System settings", a new display appears.

– Move the Controller to the left.

Closes the current display and shows theprevious display.

– Press button.

The previous display opens.

– Move the Controller to the right.

New display is opened.

An arrow indicates that additional displayscan be opened.

Opening recently used menusThe recently used menus can be displayed.

Press button twice.

Opening the Options menuPress button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The Options menu consists of various areas:

– Screen settings, for instance "Splitscreen".

– Control options for the selected mainmenu, for instance for "Media/Radio".

– If applicable, further operating optionsfor the selected menu, for instance "Savestation".

Changing settingsSettings, such as brightness, can be entered.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is displayed.


Entering letters and numbers

Input1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: deleteletters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: de-lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical listsFor alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-tries, the letters for which there is an entryare displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or rightquickly.

All letters for which there are entriesare displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en-try.

The first entry of the selected letter isdisplayed.

Operating via touchscreen

General informationThe Control Display is equipped with atouchscreen.

Seite 47



Touch screen with your fingers. Do not useany objects.

Opening the main menu Tap on symbol.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu itemsTap desired menu item.

Changing between displaysAfter a menu item is selected, a new displayopens.

An arrow indicates that additional displayscan be opened.

– Swipe to the left.

– Tap arrow.

New display is opened.

Opening recently used menus1. Tap on symbol.

2. Tap on symbol.

Changing settingsSettings such as brightness can be changedvia the touchscreen.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"



6. To create the desired setting:

– Slide in the selected field to the rightor left, until the desired setting isdisplayed.

– , Tap on symbol.

Entering letters and numbers

Input1. Touch the symbol on the touch-

screen.

A keyboard is displayed in the ControlDisplay.

2. Enter letters and numbers.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Tapping the symbol: delete theletter or number.

Tapping and holding the symbolfor an extended period: delete allletters or numbers.

Operating navigation mapThe navigation map can be moved with thetouchscreen.

Seite 48



Function Operation

Enlarge/shrinkmap.

Drag in or out with thefingers.

Touchpad

General informationSome functions of the Central InformationDisplay (CID) can be operated using thetouchpad on the Controller:

Selecting functions1. "My MINI"


3. "Touchpad"

4. Select the desired function.

– "Speller": enter letters and numbers.

– "Map": using the map.

– "Search fields": write letters withoutselecting the list field.

– "Audio feedback": pronounces en-tered letters and numbers.

Entering letters and numbersEntering letters requires some practice atthe beginning. When entering, pay atten-tion to the following:

– The system distinguishes between up-per and lower-case letters and numbers.To make entries, it may be necessary tochange between upper and lower-caseletters, numbers and characters, refer topage 47.

– Enter characters as they are displayedon the Control Display.

– Always enter associated characters,such as accents or periods so that theletter can be clearly recognized. The setlanguage determines what input is pos-

sible. Where necessary, enter specialcharacters via the Controller.

– To delete a character, swipe to the lefton the touchpad.

– To enter a blank space, swipe to theright in the center of the touchpad.

– To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right inthe upper area of the touchpad.

– To enter an underscore, swipe to theright in the lower area of the touchpad.

Using the mapThe map in the navigation system can bemoved via the touchpad.

Function Operation

Move map. Swipe in the appropriatedirection.

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out on thetouchpad with fingers.

Display menu. Tap once.

Programmable memory but-tons

General informationThe Central Information Display (CID) func-tions can be stored on the programmablememory buttons and called up directly, forinstance radio stations, navigation destina-tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profilecurrently used.

Storing a function1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but-ton, until a signal sounds.

Seite 49



Running a functionPress button.

The function will work immediately.This means, for instance that the number isdialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignmentTouch buttons with finger. Do not weargloves or use objects.

The button assignment is displayed at thetop edge of screen.

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 50



Voice activation system



Concept

Most functions displayed on the ControlDisplay can be operated by voice commandsvia the voice activation system. The systemsupports you with announcements duringinput.

General information

– Functions that can only be used whenthe vehicle is stationary can only be op-erated via the voice activation system toa limited extent.

– The system uses a special microphoneon the driver's side.

– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-bal instructions to use with the voice ac-tivation system.

– Say the commands, numbers, and letterssmoothly and with normal volume, em-phasis, and speed.

– Always say commands in the languageof the voice activation system.

Functional requirements

Via the Control Display, set a language thatis also supported by the voice activationsystem so that the spoken commands can beidentified.

To set the language, refer to page 54.

Using the voice activation sys-tem

Activating the voice activationsystem

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol in the instrument clusterindicates that the voice activation system isactive.

No other commands may be available. Inthis case, operate the function via the Cen-tral Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Press the button on the steeringwheel or ›Cancel‹.

Using a smartphone via voiceactivationA smartphone connected to the vehicle canbe used via voice activation.

Seite 51

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE


Activate voice command response on thesmartphone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button onthe steering wheel for approx. 3 sec-onds.

Voice command response is activated onthe smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirma-tion appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice com-mand response, the list of Bluetooth devicesappears on the Control Display.

Possible commands

General informationMost menu items on the Control Display canbe voiced as commands.

Commands from other menus can also bespoken.

You may select list entries such as phonelist entries via voice activation. Read theselist entries out loud exactly as they areshown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commandsThe following is displayed in the top area ofthe Control Display:

– Some possible commands for the currentmenu.

– Some possible commands from othermenus.

– Status of the voice recognition.

– Encrypted connection is not availa-ble.

Help on the voice activation system– To have information on the operating

principle of the voice activation systemread out loud: ›General information onvoice control‹.

– To have help for the current menu readout loud: ›Help‹.

Example: opening the tone set-tings

The commands of the menu items are spo-ken just as they are selected via the Con-troller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-put, if needed.

2. Press button on the steeringwheel.

3. ›Media and radio‹

4. ›Tone‹

Settings

Setting the voice dialogYou can set the system to use standard dia-log or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog playsback short messages in abbreviated form.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Speech mode:"


Seite 52

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system


Activating voice recognition viathe serverThe voice recognition feature via the serverprovides a dictation function and a naturalmethod of entering destinations while im-proving the quality of voice recognition. Touse the functions, data is transmitted to aservice provider via an encrypted connec-tion and stored locally there.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Server speech recognition"

Speaking during voice outputIt is possible to answer during inquiries ofthe voice activation system. The functioncan be deactivated if inquiries are often un-desirably interrupted, for instance due tobackground noise or talking.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Speaking during voice output"

Setting the language

The language to be used for voice activationand system announcements can be set.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired language.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the spokeninstructions until the desired volume is set.

– The volume remains constant even if thevolume of other audio sources ischanged.

– The volume is stored for the profile cur-rently used.

Information on EmergencyRequests

Do not use the voice activation system toinitiate an Emergency Request. In stressfulsituations, the voice and vocal pitch canchange. This can unnecessarily delay the es-tablishment of a phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer topage 299, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions

– Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun-roof closed to prevent noise interfer-ence.

– Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Seite 53

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE


General settings



Language

Setting the languageVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Language"

4. "Language:"


The setting is stored for the driver profilecurrently used.

Setting the voice dialogVoice dialog for the voice activation system,refer to page 52.

Time

Setting the time zoneVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:"



Setting the timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desiredhours are displayed.


7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-nutes are displayed.


Setting the time formatVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"



Seite 54

AT A GLANCE General settings


Date

Setting the dateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired dayis displayed.


7. Make the settings for the month andyear.

Setting the date formatVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"



Setting the units of measure-ment

You can set the units of measurement forsome values, for example, fuel consumption,distances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.



Activating/deactivating thedisplay of the current vehicleposition

ConceptIf vehicle location has been activated, thecurrent vehicle position can be displayed inthe MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivatingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Vehicle tracking"

4. "Vehicle tracking"


Activating/deactivatingpopup windows

For some functions, popup windows are dis-played automatically on the Control Display.Some of these popup windows can be acti-vated or deactivated.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Pop-ups"



Seite 55

General settings AT A GLANCE


Control Display

BrightnessVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"



6. Turn the Controller until the desiredbrightness is set.



Depending on the light conditions, thebrightness settings may not be clearly visi-ble.

ScreensaverIf no entries are made via the Central Infor-mation Display (CID), a screensaver can bedisplayed after an adjustable time.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Screensaver"



Messages

ConceptThe menu centrally displays all messages ar-riving in the vehicle in list form.

General informationThe following messages can be displayed:

– Traffic messages.

– Check Control messages.

– Communication messages, for examplee-mails, SMS text messages or remind-ers.

– Service requirements messages.

Messages are additionally displayed in thestatus field.

Retrieving messagesVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The respective menu is opened, where themessage is displayed.

Deleting messagesAll messages, except Check Control mes-sages, can be deleted from the list. CheckControl messages are displayed as long asthey are relevant.


1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete allnotifications"

SettingsThe following settings can be adjusted:

Seite 56



– Select the applications, from which mes-sages will be permitted.

– Sort the messages according to date orpriority.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Notifications"


Data protection

Data transfer

ConceptThe vehicle offers various functions whichrequire data to be transferred to MINI or aservice provider. The data transfer can bedeactivated for some functions.

General informationWith data transfer deactivated, the respec-tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating the datatransferFollow the instructions on the Control Dis-play.


1. Switch on the ignition.

2. "My MINI"


4. "Data privacy"


Deleting personal data in thevehicle

ConceptDepending on the usage, the vehicle storespersonal data, such as stored radio stations.This personal data can be permanently de-leted via the Central Information Display(CID).

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thefollowing data is deleted:

– Driver profile settings.

– Stored radio stations.

– Stored programmable memory buttons.

– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-tion.

– Music collection.

– Navigation, for instance stored destina-tions.

– Phone book.

– Office data, for instance voice notes.

– Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can takeup to 15 minutes.

Functional requirementData can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting dataHeed and follow the instructions on theControl Display.



2. "My MINI"


4. "Data privacy"

5. "Delete personal data"

Seite 57



6. "Delete personal data"

7. "OK"

8. Exit and lock the vehicle.

After 15 minutes, the deletion process iscompleted.

If not all of the data was deleted, repeat thedeletion.

Canceling deletionStart the engine to cancel deletion of thedata.

Connections

ConceptVarious connection types are available forusing mobile devices in the vehicle. Theconnection type to select depends on themobile device and the desired function.

General informationThe following overview shows possiblefunctions and the suitable connection typesfor them. The scope of functions depends onthe mobile device.

Function Connec-tion type

Making calls via the hands-free system.

Using phone functions viathe Central Information Dis-play (CID).

Using the smartphone Of-fice functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from thesmartphone or the audioplayer.

Bluetoothor USB.

Function Connec-tion type

Using compatible apps viathe Central Information Dis-play (CID).

Bluetoothor USB.

USB storage device:

Exporting and importingdriver profiles.

Performing software up-dates.

Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from thesmartphone or the USB stor-age device.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay appsvia the Central InformationDisplay (CID) and voice op-eration.

Bluetoothand WiFi.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

– Bluetooth.

– Apple CarPlay

Paired devices are automatically recognizedlater on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating the integrated information sys-tems and communication devices whiledriving can distract from traffic. It is pos-sible to lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident. Only use the systemsor devices when the traffic situation al-lows. As warranted, stop and use the sys-tems and devices while the vehicle is sta-tionary.

Seite 58



Compatible devices

General informationInformation on mobile devices compatiblewith the vehicle can be found at www.mini-usa.com/bluetooth.

Malfunctions may occur with devices notlisted or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identificationnumber and software part numberWhen looking for compatible devices, youmay have to state the vehicle identificationnumber and the software part number.These numbers can be displayed in the ve-hicle.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth® info"

6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 64, canbe performed, if needed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements– Compatible device, refer to page 59,

with Bluetooth interface.

– The remote control is in the vehicle.

– The device is ready for operation.

– Bluetooth is activated on the device andin the vehicle, refer to page 59.

– Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibil-ity, may be required on the device; referto the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on BluetoothVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth®"

Activating/deactivating telephonefunctionsTo use all supported functions of a mobilephone, the following functions must be acti-vated prior to pairing.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select desired setting:

– "Office"

Activate function to transmit shortmessages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,notes, and reminders to the vehicle.Costs can be incurred by transmit-ting all data to the vehicle.

– "Contact images"

Activate function to show the con-tact pictures.

6. Move the Controller to the left.

Pairing the mobile device with thevehicleVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

Seite 59



5. Select the functions for which the de-vice will be used:

– "Telephone"

– "Bluetooth® audio"

– "Apps"

– "Apple CarPlay"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle isdisplayed on the Control Display.

6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vi-cinity of the mobile device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-trol number is displayed or the controlnumber must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-played on the Control Display withthe control number on the display ofthe device.

Confirm the control number on thedevice and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same controlnumber on the device and via theCentral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayedin the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre-quently Asked Questions, refer to page 60.

Frequently asked questionsAll requirements are met and all requiredsteps were completed in the specified order.Despite that, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.

In this case, the following explanations canhelp:

Why could the mobile phone not be pairedor connected?

– There are too many Bluetooth devicesconnected to the mobile phone or vehi-cle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-tions with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connectionsfrom the device list on the mobile phoneand start a new device search.

– The mobile phone is in power-save modeor has only a limited remaining batterylife.

Charge mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re-act?

– The applications on the mobile phone donot function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and onagain.

– Possibly too high or too low ambienttemperatures for mobile phone opera-tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used viathe Central Information Display (CID)?

– The mobile phone may not be properlyconfigured, for instance as Bluetooth au-dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele-phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entriesdisplayed or why are they incomplete?

– Transmission of the phone book entriesis not yet complete.

– It is possible that only the phone bookentries of the mobile phone or the SIMcard are transmitted.

– It may not be possible to display phonebook entries with special characters.

– It may not be possible to transmit con-tacts from social networks.

Seite 60



– The number of phone book entries to bestored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, forinstance due to stored information suchas notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

– A mobile phone is only connected as anaudio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-nect it with the telephone or additionalphone function.

How can the phone connection quality beimproved?

– The strength of the Bluetooth signal onthe mobile phone can be adjusted, de-pending on the mobile phone.

– Insert mobile phone into the wirelesscharging tray.

– Adjust the volume of the microphoneand loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checkedand the required function is still not availa-ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

USB connection

General informationMobile devices with a USB port are con-nected to the USB interface.

– Mobile phones.

– Audio devices with USB port, for in-stance MP3 player.

– USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported.FAT32 and exFAT are the recommendedformats.

The following applications are possible:

– Exporting and importing driver profiles,refer to page 83.

– Playing music files via USB audio.

– Playing videos via USB video.

– Loading of software updates, refer topage 64.

Follow the following when connecting:

– Do not use force when plugging the con-nector into the USB interface.

– Use a flexible adapter cable.

– Protect the USB storage device againstmechanical damage.

– Due to the large number of USB mediaavailable on the market, it cannot beguaranteed that every device is operableon the vehicle.

– Do not expose USB media to extreme en-vironmental conditions, such as veryhigh temperatures; refer to the owner'smanual of the device.

– Due to the many different compressiontechniques, proper playback of the me-dia stored on the USB storage devicecannot be guaranteed in all cases.

– A connected USB storage device will besupplied with charging current via theUSB interface if the device supportsthis.

– To ensure proper transmission of thestored data, do not charge a USB storagedevice via the onboard socket, when itis connected to the USB interface.

– Depending on how the USB storage de-vice is being used, settings may be re-quired on the USB storage device, referto the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

– USB hard drives.

– USB hubs.

– USB memory card readers with multipleinserts.

– HFS-formatted USB media.

– Devices such as fans or lamps.

Seite 61



Functional requirementCompatible device, refer to page 59, withUSB interface.

Connecting the deviceConnect the USB storage device using asuitable adapter cable to a USB interface,refer to page 224.

The USB storage device is connected to thevehicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

ConceptCarPlay allows certain functions of a com-patible Apple iPhone to be used via Sirivoice operation and the Central InformationDisplay (CID).

Functional requirements– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 59.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile wireless contract.

– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-tion are switched on on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing iPhone with CarPlayPairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer topage 59, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle anddisplayed in the device list, refer topage 63.

OperationFor more information, refer to theIntegrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle orthe printed Owner's Manual for navigation,entertainment, communication.

Frequently asked questionsAll requirements are met and all requiredsteps were completed in the specified order.Despite that, the mobile device does notfunction as expected.

In this case, the following explanations canhelp:

The iPhone has already been paired withApple CarPlay. When a new connection isestablished, CarPlay can no longer be se-lected.

– Delete the iPhone concerned from thedevice list.

– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-cerned from the list of stored vehiclesunder Bluetooth and under WiFi.

– Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out andthe required function is still not available:contact the hotline, a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Managing mobile devices

General information– After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon-nected when the ignition is switched on.

Seite 62



– The data stored on the SIM card or inthe mobile phone are transferred to thevehicle after recognition.

– For some devices, certain settings maybe necessary, for instance authorization,see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device listAll devices paired and/or connected withthe vehicle are displayed in the device list.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a de-vice is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the deviceFunctions can be activated or deactivatedfor paired and connected devices.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.


If a function is assigned to a device, thefunction will be deactivated where appro-priate for a device that is already connectedand the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the deviceThe connection of the device to the vehicleis disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con-nected again, refer to page 63.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the deviceA disconnected device can be reconnected.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de-vice before disconnecting are assigned tothe device when it is reconnected. If the de-vice is already connected, these functionsare deactivated.

Deleting the deviceVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removedfrom the device list.

Seite 63



Swapping the telephone and additionalphoneIf two mobile phones are connected to thevehicle, the functions of the phone and ad-ditional phone can be switched.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General informationThe vehicle supports a large number of mo-bile devices, for instance mobile phones andMP3 players. Software updates are availablefor many of the supported devices. The ve-hicle is maintained up-to-date via regularvehicle software updates.

Updates and related current information isavailable on the Internet at www.mini.com/update.

Displaying the installed softwareversionThe software version installed in the vehicleis displayed.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Software update"

4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, se-lect the desired version to display additionalinformation.

Updating software via USBThe software may only be updated when thevehicle is stationary.


1. Store the file for the software update inthe main directory of a USB flash drive.

2. Connect the USB data storage to a USBinterface.

3. "My MINI"



6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"

10. Wait for the update to complete.

11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software versionThe software version before the last soft-ware update and the version before the firstsoftware update can be restored.

The software may only be restored whenthe vehicle is stationary.


1. "My MINI"



4. "Restore software"

5. – "Previous version"

The previous software version is re-stored.

– "Default software settings"

The first software version is re-stored.

6. "Remove software"

7. "OK"

Seite 64



8. Wait for restore.

9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 65



Owner's Manual media



General information

You can use the following media formats tocall up the content in the Owner's Manual:

– Printed Owner's Manual, refer topage 66.

– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-cle, refer to page 66.

Printed Owner's Manual

ConceptThe printed Owner's Manual describes allstandard, country-specific, and optional fea-tures offered with the series.

General informationThe Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-tainment, and Communication can be ob-tained as printed book from the service cen-ter.

Supplementary Owner's ManualsAlso follow the instructions of the Supple-mentary Owner's Manuals, which are in-cluded in addition to the onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual inthe vehicle

ConceptThe Integrated Owner's Manual specificallydescribes features and functions found inthe vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manualcan be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press button.

2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the required method of accessingthe contents.

Scrolling through the owner'smanualTurn the Controller, until the next or previ-ous contents are displayed.

Context help

General informationThe section of the Owner's Manual relatingto the function that is currently selectedcan be displayed directly.

Seite 66

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media


Opening via Central InformationDisplay (CID)Change directly to the Options menu fromthe function on the Control Display:

1. Press button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message onthe Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo switch from a function, for instanceradio, to the Owner's Manual on the ControlDisplay and to alternate between the twodisplays:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner'sManual.

4. Press the button again to return tolast displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to thepage of the Owner's Manual displayedlast.

To alternate continuously between the lastdisplayed function and the last displayedpage of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4& 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on theprogrammable memory buttons and calledup directly.

Storing1. Select the desired entry point via the

Central Information Display (CID):

– "Quick reference"

– "Search by pictures"

– "Keyword search"

– "Animations"

2. Press and hold the desired but-ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing

Press button.

The Owner's Manual is displayedimmediately.

Seite 67

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE


68


CONTROLS

Opening and closing ................................................................................ 70Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ..................................................... 94Transporting children safely .............................................................. 107Driving ...................................................................................................... 112Displays .................................................................................................... 137Lights ........................................................................................................ 157Safety ......................................................................................................... 163Driving stability control systems ..................................................... 184Driving comfort ...................................................................................... 189Climate control ....................................................................................... 209Interior equipment ................................................................................ 218Storage compartments ......................................................................... 225Cargo area ................................................................................................ 228


Opening and closing



Remote control

General informationThe vehicle is supplied with two remotecontrols with integrated key.

Each remote control contains a replaceablebattery. Replacing the battery, refer topage 73.

You may set the button functions, depend-ing on the vehicle equipment and countryversion. Settings, refer to page 86.

The vehicle stores personal settings for ev-ery remote control. Driver profile, refer topage 83.

The remote controls hold information aboutrequired maintenance. Service data in theremote control, refer to page 285.

To prevent possible locking in of the remotecontrol, take the remote control with youwhen exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

WARNING

People or animals in the vehicle can lockthe doors from the inside and lock them-selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannotbe opened from the outside. There is a riskof injury. Take the remote control withyou so that the vehicle can be opened fromthe outside.

WARNING

Unlocking from the inside is only possiblewith special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in thevehicle while being exposed to extremetemperatures are at risk of injury or death.Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there are people in it.

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can causethe vehicle to move and endanger them-selves and traffic, for instance due to thefollowing actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors orwindows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Donot leave children or animals unattendedin the vehicle. Take the remote controlwith you when exiting and lock the vehi-cle.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing


Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

With automatic tailgate operation: openthe tailgate

4 Panic mode

UnlockingPress the button on the remote con-trol.

Depending on the settings, refer topage 86, the following access points areunlocked.

– Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the remote controlagain to unlock the other vehicle accesspoints.

– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are exe-cuted:

– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-nals and the horn. This function must beactivated in the settings, refer topage 86.

– The settings stored in the driver profile,refer to page 83, are applied.

– The driver's seat is set to the last posi-tion saved in the driver's profile. Thisfunction must be activated in the set-tings, refer to page 86.

– The interior lights, refer to page 161,and the MINI logo projection areswitched on, provided that the interiorlights were not switched off manually.

– Depending on the settings, the welcomelight and headlight courtesy delay fea-ture, refer to page 158, are switched on.

– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-ient closing are folded open.

– The alarm system, refer to page 87, isswitched off.

The light functions may depend on the am-bient brightness.

Convenient openingPress and hold this button on theremote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the remotecontrol is pressed.

Locking1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press button on the remote con-trol.

The following functions are executed:

– All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel fillerflap are locked.

– Locking is confirmed by the turn signalsand the horn. This function must be ac-tivated in the settings, refer topage 86.

– The alarm system, refer to page 87, isswitched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched onwhen you lock the vehicle, the vehicle hornhonks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-nition must be switched off by means of theStart/Stop button.

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS


With Comfort Access: convenientclosing

Safety information

WARNING

With convenient closing, body parts canbe jammed. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of thedoors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold this button on theremote control in the area close tothe vehicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof areclosed, as long as the button on the remotecontrol is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights andcourtesy light

Press button on the remote controlwith the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switchedon.

These functions are not available if the inte-rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am-bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-ing the button again.

Tailgate

General informationTo avoid locking it in the vehicle, do notplace the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, it is possible to specifywhether the tailgate can be operated withthe remote control and how the vehicledoors will respond to this. Adjust the set-tings, refer to page 86.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operatingthe tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of the tail-gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when itopens. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Make sure that the area of movementof the tailgate is clear during opening andclosing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit thewindows and heat conductors while driv-ing. There is a risk of damage to property.Cover the edges and ensure that pointedobjects do not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the re-mote control for approx. 1 second.

Without automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swungupward.

With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Seite 72




– Press button on the remote con-trol and hold for at least 3 sec-onds.

– Briefly press the button on the remotecontrol three times in succession.


Replacing the battery1. Remove the integrated key from the re-

mote control, refer to page 75.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open-ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover ofthe battery compartment and raise thecover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-row using a pointed object and lift itout.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with thepositive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the remotecontrol until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional remote controlsAdditional remote controls are availablefrom a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controlsA lost remote control can be blocked and re-placed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Malfunction

General informationA Check Control message is displayed.

Remote control detection by the vehiclemay malfunction under the following cir-cumstances:

Seite 73



– The battery of the remote control is dis-charged. Replacing the battery, refer topage 73.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom transmission towers or otherequipment with high transmittingpower.

– Shielding of the remote control due tometal objects.

Do not transport the remote control to-gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom mobile phones or other electronicdevices in direct proximity to the re-mote control.

Do not transport the remote control to-gether with electronic devices.

– Interference of radio transmission by acharging process of mobile devices, forinstance charging of a mobile phone.

– The remote control is in direct proximityof the wireless charging tray.

Place the remote control down at a dif-ferent location.

In the case of interference, the vehicle canbe unlocked and locked from the outsidewith the integrated key, refer to page 74.

Starting the engine via emergencydetection of the remote control

It is not possible to start the engine if theremote control has not been detected.

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the remote control has notbeen detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the remote control as shownagainst the marked area on the steeringcolumn. Pay attention to the display inthe instrument cluster.

2. If the remote control is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the remote control is not detected,slightly change the position of the remotecontrol and repeat the procedure.

Frequently asked questionsWhat precautions can be taken to be able toopen a vehicle with an accidentally lockedin remote control?

– The options provided by the RemoteServices of the MINI Connected app in-clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connectedcontract and the MINI Connected appmust be installed on a smartphone.

– Unlocking the vehicle can be requestedvia the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract isrequired.

Integrated key

General informationThe driver's door can be locked and un-locked without remote control using theintegrated key.

Seite 74



Safety information

WARNING

Unlocking from the inside is only possiblewith special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in thevehicle while being exposed to extremetemperatures are at risk of injury or death.Do not lock the vehicle from the outsidewhen there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined withthe door. The door handle can be moved.When pulling the door handle with theintegrated key inserted, paint or theintegrated key can be damaged. There is arisk of damage to property. Remove theintegrated key before pulling the outsidedoor handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out theintegrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the doorlock1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key intothe opening from below and remove thelid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using theintegrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or lockedfrom the inside.

Alarm systemThe alarm system is not switched on if thevehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when thedoor is opened, if the vehicle has been un-locked via the door lock. In order to stopthis alarm, unlock vehicle with the remotecontrol or switch on the ignition, if needed,through emergency detection of the remotecontrol, refer to page 73.

Buttons for the central lockingsystem

General informationIn the event of a severe accident, the vehi-cle is automatically unlocked. The hazardwarning system and interior lights come on.

Seite 75



Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

LockingPress the button with the frontdoors closed.

– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

– The vehicle is not secured against theftwhen locking.

UnlockingPress button.

Opening

– Press button to unlock the doorstogether, and then pull the door handleabove the armrest.

– Front doors: pull the door handle on thedoor to open the door. The other doorsremain locked.

– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-dle on the door to be opened; the firsttime unlocks the door, the second timeopens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

ConceptThe vehicle can be accessed without acti-vating the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remotecontrol with you, such as in your pantspocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the re-mote control when it is in close proximityor in the car's interior.

General informationComfort Access supports the followingfunctions:

– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

– Convenient closing.

– Open the tailgate.

– Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch activation.

This function must be activated in thesettings, refer to page 86.

This function is not available in vehicleswith a trailer hitch or with a rear lug-gage rack preparation.

Functional requirements– To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehiclenear the doors.

– The next unlocking and locking cycle isnot possible until after approx. 2 sec-onds.

Seite 76



Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outerdoor handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer topage 86, only the driver's door and thefuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlikewhen unlocking with the remote control,pressing the button on the outer door han-dle again does not unlock the other vehicleaccess points. Rather, the vehicle is lockedagain.

If a door of a locked vehicle was openedfrom the inside via the door opener, press-ing the button on the outer door handle firstlocks the vehicle again. To unlock, the but-ton on the outer door handle must bepressed again.

This is the case whether the vehicle waslocked automatically after driving off or viathe central locking system button from theinside.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outerdoor handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

WARNING

With convenient closing, body parts canbe jammed. There is a risk of injury. Makesure that the area of movement of thedoors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv-er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows andglass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Seite 77



Opening the tailgate

General informationIf the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do notplace the remote control in the cargo area.

Safety information

WARNING


NOTICE


NOTICE


Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation:


With automatic tailgate operation:

The tailgate opens automatically.

Opening and closing the split doorswith no-touch activation

ConceptThe tailgate can be opened and closed withno-touch activation using the remote con-trol you are carrying. Two sensors detect aforward-directed foot motion in the centralrear area and the tailgate is opened orclosed.

This function is not available in vehicleswith a trailer hitch or with a rear luggagerack preparation.


If the remote control is in the sensor area,the tailgate can be opened or closed inad-vertently by an unconscious or alleged rec-ognized foot movement.

The sensor has an approximate range of5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of thevehicle.

Seite 78



If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti-vation, locked doors are not unlocked.

Contactless opening and closing of the tail-gate must be activated in the settings.

Safety information

WARNING

During no-touch activation, vehicle partsmay be touched, such as the hot exhaustgas system. There is a risk of injury. Whenmoving your foot, make sure you have afirm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

WARNING


NOTICE


Settings1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"


– "Open by foot movement"

Contactless opening of the tailgate isswitched on or off.

– "Close by foot movement"

Contactless closing of the tailgate isswitched on or off.

Performing the foot movement1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle

at approx. one arm's length away fromthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-rection of travel and immediately pull itback. With this movement, the leg mustpass through the ranges of both sensors.

OpeningPerform the foot movement described ear-lier.

Before the opening, the hazard warning sys-tem flashes.

When the touchless closing is switched on:moving your foot again will stop the open-ing motion, and moving it one more time af-ter that will close the tailgate.

ClosingPerform the foot movement described ear-lier.

Before closing, the hazard warning systemflashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

When the touchless opening is switched on:moving your foot again will stop the closingmotion, and moving it one more time afterthat will open the tailgate.

Seite 79



MalfunctionRemote control detection by the vehiclemay malfunction under the following cir-cumstances:

– The battery of the remote control is dis-charged. Replacing the battery, refer topage 73.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom transmission towers or otherequipment with high transmittingpower.

– Shielding of the remote control due tometal objects.

Do not transport the remote control to-gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connectionfrom mobile phones or other electronicdevices in direct proximity to the re-mote control.

Do not transport the remote control to-gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt thelocking request recognition function on thedoor handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock andlock the vehicle using the buttons of the re-mote control or using the integrated key, re-fer to page 74.

Tailgate


Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, it is possible to specifywhether the tailgate can be operated withthe remote control and how the vehicledoors will respond to this. Adjust the set-tings, refer to page 86.

Safety information

WARNING


NOTICE


NOTICE


Without automatic tailgateoperation

Opening from the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-cle or have the remote control with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

Seite 80




Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked. Unlocking with the re-mote control, refer to page 72.


Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull thebutton in the storage compartment of thedriver's door upwards.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull thebutton in the storage compartment of thedriver's door upwards twice in quick suc-cession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of thetailgate can be used to conveniently pulldown the tailgate.

With automatic tailgate operation

Opening

Adjusting the opening height

You can set how far the tailgate shouldopen.

When adjusting the opening height, ensurethat there is a clearance of at least4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Tailgate"

5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desiredopening height.

From the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-cle or have the remote control with you.

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.


Depending on the setting, the doors mayalso be unlocked. Unlocking with the re-mote control, refer to page 72.

Seite 81



If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgateopens automatically to the adjusted openingheight.

From the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

Pull button in the storage compart-ment of the driver's door upward.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull thebutton in the storage compartment of thedriver's door upwards twice in quick suc-cession.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgateopens automatically to the adjusted openingheight.

Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in thefollowing situations:

– When the vehicle starts moving.

– By pressing the button on the outside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By pressing the button on the inside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By pressing the button on the remotecontrol. Pressing again continues theopening motion.

– By pressing or pulling the button in thestorage compartment of the driver'sdoor. Pulling again continues the open-ing motion.

Closing

From the outside

Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

From the inside

Press and hold the button in the stor-age compartment of the driver's door.

The remote control must be located in thecar's interior for this function.

An acoustic signal sounds before the tail-gate is closed.

From inside the tailgate

Without Comfort Access:

Press button on the inside of the tailgate.

With Comfort Access:

– Press button, arrow 1, on the inside ofthe tailgate.

– Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closingthe tailgate. The driver's door must beclosed for this purpose and the remotecontrol must be outside of the vehicle inthe area of the tailgate.

Seite 82



Interruption of the closing procedure

The closing procedure is interrupted in thefollowing situations:

– If the vehicle starts off with a jerkymovement.

– By pressing the button on the outside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By pressing the button on the inside ofthe tailgate. Pressing again closes thetailgate.

– By releasing the button in the storagecompartment of the driver's door. Press-ing again and holding continues theclosing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information

WARNING

With manual operation of a blocked tail-gate, it can release itself unexpectedlyfrom the blockage. There is a risk of injuryor risk of damage to property. Do not oper-ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked.Have it checked by a dealer’s service cen-ter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

Manual operation

Operate the unlocked tailgate manually witha slow and smooth motion.

To close the tailgate fully, press downlightly only. Closing occurs automatically.

Driver profile

ConceptIn the driver profiles, individual settings forseveral drivers can be stored and called upagain when required.

General informationThere are three driver profiles with whichpersonal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-ery remote control has one of these driverprofiles assigned.

If the vehicle is unlocked using a remotecontrol, the assigned personal driver profilewill be activated. All settings stored in thedriver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own remote con-trol, the vehicle will adjust the personal set-tings during unlocking. These settings arealso restored, if the vehicle has been used inthe meantime by a person with a differentremote control.

Changes to the settings are automaticallystored in the driver profile currently acti-vated.

If another driver profile is selected via theCentral Information Display (CID), the set-tings stored in it will be applied automati-cally. The new driver profile is assigned tothe remote control currently used.

There is an additional guest profile availablethat is not assigned to any remote control: itcan be used to apply settings in the vehiclewithout changing the personal driver pro-files.

Functional requirementsFor the system to be able to identify thedriver profile associated to a particulardriver, the detected remote control must beclearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

Seite 83



– The driver is only carrying his or herown remote control.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle.

– The driver gets into the vehicle throughthe driver's door.

SettingsThe settings for the following systems andfunctions are stored in the active profile.The scope of storable settings depends oncountry and equipment.

– Unlocking and locking.

– Lights.

– Radio.

– Instrument cluster.

– Programmable memory buttons.

– Volumes, tone.

– Control Display.

– Climate control.

– Navigation.

– PDC Park Distance Control.

– Rearview camera.

– Head-up Display.

– MINI Driving Modes.

– Intelligent Safety.

– Driver's seat position, exterior mirrorposition.

Both the positions saved via the seatmemory and the last position set aresaved.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profileRegardless of the remote control in use, adifferent driver profile may be activated.This allows you to call up personal vehiclesettings, even if you did not unlock the ve-hicle with your own remote control.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

– All settings stored in the called-updriver profile are automatically applied.

– The called-up driver profile is assignedto the remote control being used at thetime.

– If the driver profile is already assignedto a different remote control, this driverprofile will apply to both remote con-trols.

Using a guest profileThe guest profile is for individual settingsthat are stored in none of the three personaldriver profiles.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Drive off (guest)"

4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It isnot assigned to the current remote control.

Renaming a driver profileA personal name can be assigned to the ac-tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-tween the driver profiles.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name"

Seite 84



5. Enter profile name.


Resetting a driver profileThe settings of the driver profile currentlyin use are reset to their factory settings.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be reset.

4. "Reset driver profile"

5. "OK"

Exporting driver profilesMost settings of the active driver profilecan be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and re-trieving personal settings, for instance be-fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.The stored driver profiles can be taken intoanother vehicle.


1. "My MINI"



The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profilesProfiles stored on a USB storage device canbe imported via the USB interface.

The existing settings of the active driverprofile are overwritten with the settings ofthe imported driver profile.


1. "My MINI"


3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with thissymbol can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during startThe driver profiles can be displayed duringeach start to select the desired profile.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limitsA clear assignment between the remotecontrol and driver may not be possible inthe following cases, for example.

– The passenger unlocks the vehicle withhis or her own remote control, but an-other person is driving.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-fort Access and has multiple remotecontrols with him or her.

– The driver changes, but the vehicle isnot locked and unlocked.

– Multiple remote controls are locatedoutside of the vehicle.

Seite 85



Settings

General informationDepending on the package and country ver-sion, various settings are available for theremote control functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro-file, refer to page 83, currently used.

Unlocking

DoorsVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"


– "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuelfiller flap are unlocked. Pressingagain unlocks the entire vehicle.

– "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

TailgateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicatesthe current setting.


– "Tailgate"

Depending on your vehicle's optionalfeatures, the tailgate is either un-locked or opened.

– "Tailgate and door(s)"

Depending on your vehicle's optionalfeatures, the tailgate is either un-locked or opened and the doors un-locked.

– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked beforethe tailgate can be used with the re-mote control.

– "Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgatevia the remote control.

Depending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, this setting may not be of-fered.

Adjusting the last seat and mirrorpositionVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"



The setting can be made for thedriver profile marked with this symbol.

4. "Last seat position automatic"

When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver'sseat and exterior mirrors resume their lastset positions.

The most recent position is independent ofthe positions saved via the seat memory.

Automatic lockingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"


– "Lock automatically"

Seite 86



The vehicle locks automatically aftera short period of time if no door isopened after unlocking.

– "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive off.

Automatic unlockingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off bypressing the Start/Stop button, thelocked vehicle is automatically un-locked.

Confirmation signals from thevehicleVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-firmation signals.

– "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,locking by one.

– With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk ofthe horn.

Alarm system

General informationWhen the vehicle is locked, the vehiclealarm system reacts to the followingchanges:

– Unauthorized opening of a door, thehood or the tailgate.

– Movements in the car's interior.

– Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., duringattempts at stealing a wheel or whentowing the vehicle.

– Disconnected battery voltage.

– Improper use of the socket for OnboardDiagnosis.

– Locking the vehicle while a device isconnected to the socket for the OBD On-board-Diagnosis. Socket for the OBD On-board Diagnosis, refer to page 286.

The alarm system signals these changes vis-ually and acoustically:

– Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, theacoustic alarm may be suppressed.

– Visual alarm:

By flashing the exterior lighting.

Overview

Indicator light in the roof fin.

Seite 87



Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/offWhen you unlock and lock the vehicle, ei-ther with the remote control or with Com-fort Access, the alarm system is switchedoff and on at the same time.

Opening the doors with the alarmsystem switched onThe alarm system is triggered when a dooris opened if the door was unlocked usingthe integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 89.

Opening the tailgate with the alarmsystem switched onThe tailgate can be opened even when thealarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked andmonitored again provided the doors arelocked. The hazard warning system flashesonce.


– Press button on the remote con-trol and hold for at least 3 sec-onds.

– Briefly press the button on the remotecontrol three times in succession.


Signals of the indicator lights– The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

– Indicator light flashes for approx.10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarmsensor are not active, as doors, hood, ortailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points areclosed, interior motion sensor and tiltalarm sensor will be switched on.

– The indicator light goes out after un-locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

– The indicator light flashes after unlock-ing until the engine ignition is switchedon, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situationssuch as attempts to steal a wheel or whenthe vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and the glass sunroof must beclosed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General informationThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motionsensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

Seite 88



– In automatic vehicle washes.

– In duplex garages.

– During transport on trains carrying ve-hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

– With animals in the vehicle.

– When the vehicle is locked after start offueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the remote control buttonagain within 10 seconds as soon asthe vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motionsensor are switched off until the vehicle islocked again.

Switching off the alarm– Unlock the vehicle with the remote con-

trol or switch on the ignition, if neededthrough emergency detection of remotecontrol, refer to page 73.

– With Comfort Access: If you have theremote control with you, unlock the ve-hicle using the button on the driver'sside or passenger side door.

Power windows

General informationIf an accident of a certain severity occurs,the windows are automatically closed ex-cept a gap.

Safety information

WARNING

When operating the windows, body partsand objects can be jammed. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe windows is clear during opening andclosing.

Overview

Power windows.

Safety switch.

Opening

– Press the switch to the resistancepoint.

The window opens while the switch isbeing held.

– Press the switch beyond the resist-ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press-ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening via the remote control,refer to page 71.

Seite 89



Closing

– Pull the switch to the resistancepoint.

The window closes while the switch isbeing held.

– Pull the switch beyond the resist-ance point.

The window closes automatically if thedoor is closed. Pulling the switch againstops the motion.

Convenient closing via the remote control,refer to page 72.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer topage 77.

Jam protection system

General informationIf the closing force exceeds a specific valueas one of the front windows closes, the clos-ing action is interrupted.

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

WARNING

Accessories on the windows such as an-tennas can impact jam protection. There isa risk of injury. Do not install accessoriesin the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protectionsystemIn case of danger from the outside or if icemight prevent normal closing, proceed asfollows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro-tection. If the closing force exceeds aspecific threshold, closing is inter-rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistancepoint again within approx. 4 secondsand hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec-tion.

Safety switch

General informationThe safety switch in the driver's door can beused to prevent children, for instance fromopening and closing the rear windows usingthe switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,the safety function is switched off automati-cally.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED lights up if the safety func-tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General informationIn certain situations a window can only beoperated to a limited extent.

– After a power failure during the openingor closing process, the a window canonly be operated to a limited extent. Thesystem must be initialized in this case.

– The power window motors are equippedwith overheating protection. If a win-dow is opened and closed several timeswithin a short period of time, the over-heating protection switches the motoroff temporarily. Depending on the de-gree of overheating, it may only be pos-

Seite 90



sible to close the window or it may notbe possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power windowmotor to cool down.

Initializing the systemThe system can be initialized when the ve-hicle is stationary and the engine is run-ning.

During initialization, the affected windowcloses without jam protection.

WARNING

When operating the windows, body partsand objects can be jammed. There is a riskof injury or risk of damage to property.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe windows is clear during opening andclosing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistancepoint and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulledto the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once ortwice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General informationIn the event of a severe accident, the glasssunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operatingthe glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the area of movement ofthe glass sunroof is clear during openingand closing.

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroofPress back the switch up to orbeyond the resistance pointand release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyondthe resistance point and re-lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch againstops the motion.

Seite 91



With the glass sunroof completelyraised

– Slide switch back to the re-sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof isopened as long as theswitch is pressed.

– Press the switch back beyond the resist-ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-tion.

Comfort positionIn some models, the wind noises in the car'sinterior are lowest when the glass sunroofis not fully open. In these models, the auto-matic function initially only opens the glasssunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glasssunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open– Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closedas long as the switch ispressed and stops in theraised position.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops inthe raised position.


– Press the switch forward beyond the re-sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.


With the glass sunroof completelyraised

Press the switch forward be-yond the resistance point andrelease it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

General informationIf the closing force exceeds a specific valueas a glass sunroof closes, the closing actionis interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protectionsystemIf there is an external danger, proceed asfollows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist-ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limitedjam protection. If the closing force ex-ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past theresistance point and hold until the glasssunroof closes without jam protection.Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Seite 92



Initializing after a powerinterruptionAfter a power failure during the opening orclosing process, the glass sunroof can onlybe operated to a limited extent. The systemmust be initialized in this case. MINI rec-ommends having this work performed onlyby a dealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 93



Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel



Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets theneeds of the occupants can make a vitalcontribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat-ing position plays an important role. Followthe information in the following chapters:

– Seats, refer to page 94.

– Safety belts, refer to page 98.

– Head restraints, refer to page 100.

– Airbags, refer to page 163.

Front seats

Safety information

WARNING

Seat adjustments while driving can lead tounexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-cle control could be lost. There is a risk ofan accident. Only adjust the seat on thedriver's side when the vehicle is station-ary.

WARNING

With a backrest inclined too far to therear, the efficacy of the safety belt can nolonger be ensured. There is a risk of slid-ing under the safety belt in an accident.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.Adjust the backrest so that it is in themost upright position as possible and donot adjust again while driving.

WARNING

There is a risk of jamming when movingthe seats. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Make sure that thearea of movement of the seat is clear priorto any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 94

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel


Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for-ward or back slightly making sure it en-gages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often asneeded to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can beadjusted in a way that it supports the lum-bar region of the spine. The lower back andthe spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-crease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General informationThe seat setting for the driver's seat isstored for the profile currently used. Whenthe vehicle is unlocked via the remote con-trol, the position is automatically retrievedif the function, refer to page 86, is activatedfor this purpose.

The current seat position can be stored us-ing the memory function, refer to page 102.

Overview

1 Memory function

2 Lumbar support

Seite 95

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS


3 Backrest tilt

4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Forward/backward

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept

The curvature of the seat backrest can beadjusted in a way that it supports the lum-bar region of the spine. The lower back andthe spine are supported for upright posture.

Settings

– Press the front/rear sec-tion of the button:

The curvature is in-creased/decreased.

– Press the upper/lower sec-tion of the button:

The curvature is shiftedup/down.

Seite 96



Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-just the thigh support.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press button once for each tempera-ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-vated automatically with the temperatureselected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer topage 244, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button, until theLEDs go out.

Rear seats

Safety information

WARNING

There is a risk of jamming when foldingdown the center armrest in the rear. Thereis a risk of injury. Make sure that the areaof movement of the center armrest is clearduring folding down.

WARNING

Unexpected movements of the rear seatbackrest while driving may occur due tounintentional unlocking of the rear seatbackrests by the straps. There is a risk ofinjury. Do not fasten any objects to thestraps for unlocking the rear backrests.

Forward/backward

General informationThe rear seat is divided at a ratio of 60 to40. The left seat is connected to the centersection.

Seite 97



Settings

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-sired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat for-ward or back slightly making sure it en-gages properly.

Backrest tilt

Pull the strap and apply your weight to thebackrest or lift it off, as necessary.

After the adjustment, move the backrestslightly forward or back to engage it cor-rectly.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safetybelt bucklesThe vehicle is fitted with five safety belts toensure occupant safety. However, they canonly offer protection when adjusted cor-rectly.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rearseat are intended for the persons sitting onthe left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rearseat is intended for the person sitting in themiddle.

General informationAlways make sure that safety belts are be-ing worn by all occupants before driving off.Although airbags enhance safety by provid-ing added protection, they are not a substi-tute for safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in therear from the belt buckle on the side.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage pointwill be correct for adult seat occupants ofevery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

WARNING

Use of a safety belt to buckle more thanone person will potentially defeat the abil-ity of the safety belt to serve its protectivefunction. There is a risk of injuries or dan-ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-son to wear a single safety belt. Infantsand children are not allowed on an occu-pant's lap, but must be transported and se-cured in designated child restraint sys-tems.

WARNING

The efficacy of safety gear, includingsafety belts, can be limited or lost whensafety belts are fastened incorrectly. Anincorrectly fastened safety belt can causeadditional injuries, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju-ries or danger to life. Make sure that all

Seite 98



occupants are wearing safety belts cor-rectly.

WARNING

The efficacy of safety gear, includingsafety belts, may not be fully functional orfail in the following situations:

– The safety belts or safety belt bucklesare damaged, soiled, or changed inany other way.

– Belt tensioners or belt retractorswere modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damagedin the event of an accident. There is a riskof injuries or danger to life. Do not modifysafety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors andkeep them clean. Have the safety beltschecked after an accident at the dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should-ers.

– Wear the safety belt deep on your hipsover your lap. The safety belt may notpress on your stomach.

– Do not rub the safety belt against sharpedges, or guide it or jam it in acrosshard or fragile objects.

– Avoid thick clothing.

– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the

holder when fastening it.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safetybelt buckle. The safety belt buckle mustengage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Middle safety belt in the rear

Buckling the safety belt

1. Pull the buckle tongues out of themounts in the roof.

2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in thebelt buckle, arrow 1.

3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in thebelt buckle, arrow 2.

Safety belt buckles must audibly clickinto place.

Seite 99



Unbuckling the safety belt1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to openthe second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in theroofliner.

Safety belt reminder for driver'sseat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and asignal sounds. Make sure that thesafety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti-vated if objects are placed on the front pas-senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

WARNING

A missing protective effect due to re-moved or not correctly adjusted head re-straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removedhead restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its centersupports the back of the head at asclose to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the headrestraint is as close as possible to theback of the head. Adjust the distancevia the backrest tilt as needed.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when movingthe head restraint. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that the area of movement isclear when moving the head restraint.

WARNING

Objects on the head restraint reduce theprotective effect in the head and neckarea. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instanceclothes hangers, directly on the headrestraint.

– Only use accessories that have beendetermined to be safe for attachmentto a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John CooperWorks sport seatThe height of the head restraints cannot beadjusted.

Seite 100



Adjusting the height



After setting the height, move the head re-straint up or down slightly, making sure itengages properly.

Removing: John Cooper Workssport seatThe head restraints cannot be removed.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no onewill be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrestforward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull thehead restraint out completely.

InstallingProceed in the reverse order to install thehead restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

WARNING

A missing protective effect due to re-moved or not correctly adjusted head re-straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removedhead restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its centersupports the back of the head at asclose to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the headrestraint is as close as possible to theback of the head. Adjust the distancevia the backrest tilt as needed.

WARNING


WARNING

Objects on the head restraint reduce theprotective effect in the head and neckarea. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instanceclothes hangers, directly on the headrestraint.

Seite 101



– Only use accessories that have beendetermined to be safe for attachmentto a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height



After setting the height, move the head re-straint up or down slightly, making sure itengages properly.

Fold down

– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,and press down the head restraint, ar-row 2.

– Forward: fold the head restraint towardthe front as far as it will go. Make surethat the head restraint engages cor-rectly.

RemovingThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Memory function

ConceptThe following settings can be stored and, ifnecessary, retrieved using the memoryfunction:

– Seat position.

– Exterior mirror position.

– Height of the Head-up Display.

General informationDifferent settings can be assigned to twomemory locations.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is notstored.

Safety information

WARNING


WARNING

Using the memory function while drivingcan lead to unexpected movements of theseat. Vehicle control could be lost. There isa risk of an accident. Only retrieve thememory function when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

Seite 102



Overview

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

3. Press button. The LED in thebutton lights up.

4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while theLED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settingsThe stored position is called up automati-cally.

Press selected button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a switch for set-ting the seat or one of the memory buttonsis pressed.

While driving, the seat position adjustmenton the driver's side is interrupted after ashort time.

Calling up of a seat positiondeactivatedAfter a brief period, calling up stored seatpositions is deactivated to save batterypower.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

– Open or close the door or tailgate.

– Press a button on the remote control.

– Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the front passenger side ismore curved than the driver's side mirror.

The mirror setting is stored for the driverprofile currently in use. When the vehicle isunlocked via the remote control, the posi-tion is automatically retrieved if the func-tion, refer to page 86, is activated for thispurpose.

The current exterior mirror position can bestored using the memory function, refer topage 102.

Safety information

WARNING

Objects reflected in the mirror are closerthan they appear. The distance to the traf-fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,for instance while changing lanes. There isa risk of an accident. Estimate the distanceto the traffic behind by looking over yourshoulder.

Seite 103



Overview

1 Settings

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press button.

The mirror movement follows thebutton movement.

MalfunctionIn case of an electrical malfunction, adjustthe mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-ror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.There is a risk of damage to property. Be-fore washing, fold in the mirrors by handor with the button.

Press button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful inthe following situations:

– In vehicle washes.

– On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded outautomatically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automaticallyheated whenever the ignition is switchedon.

Automatic dimming featureThe exterior mirror on the driver's side isautomatically dimmed. Photocells in thecar's interior mirror, refer to page 105, areused to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exteriormirror

ConceptIf reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glasson the front passenger side is tilted down-ward. This improves your view of the curband other low-lying obstacles when parking,for instance.

Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver'sside mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger'sside mirror position.

Seite 104



Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interiormirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effectby the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimmingfeature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

– In the mirror glass.

– On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements– Keep the photocells clean.

– Do not cover the area between the inte-rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

WARNING

Steering wheel adjustments while drivingcan lead to unexpected steering wheelmovements. Vehicle control could be lost.There is a risk of an accident. Adjust thesteering wheel while the vehicle is sta-tionary only.

Seite 105



Settings

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-red height and angle to suit your seatingposition.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 106



Transporting children safely




The right place for children

Safety information

WARNING








Always transport children in therear seat

General informationAccident research shows that the safestplace for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years ofage or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in therear seat in suitable child restraint systems

designed for the age, weight and size of thechild. Children 13 years of age or older mustwear a safety belt as soon as a suitable childrestraint system can no longer be used dueto their age, weight, and size.

Safety information

WARNING

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,150 cm without suitable additional childrestraint systems. The efficacy of safetygear, including safety belts, can be limitedor lost when safety belts are fastened in-correctly. An incorrectly fastened safetybelt can cause additional injuries, for in-stance in the event of an accident or dur-ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Thereis a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se-cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm us-ing suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passengerseat

General informationBefore using a child restraint system on thefront passenger seat, ensure that the front,knee, and side airbags on the front passen-

Seite 107

Transporting children safely CONTROLS


ger side are deactivated. Automatic deacti-vation of front-seat passenger airbags, referto page 165.

Safety information

WARNING

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-jure a child in a child restraint systemwhen the airbags are activated. There is arisk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated andthat the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor light lights up.

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats andbackrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys-tems

General informationPay attention to the specifications of thechild restraint system manufacturer whenselecting, installing, and using child re-straint systems.

Safety information

WARNING

The protective effect of damaged child re-straint systems or of child restraint sys-tems exposed to an accident and their fas-tening systems can be limited or lost. Achild can e.g.,not sufficiently restrained,for instance in the event of an accident orbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is arisk of injuries or danger to life. Have dam-aged child restraint systems or of child re-straint systems exposed to an accident andtheir fastening systems checked and possi-bly replaced by the dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or re-pair shop.

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats andbackrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

On the rear seatsIf the vehicle is equipped with a sliding rearseat row: move the seats to the rearmost po-sition before mounting a child restraint sys-tem.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Transporting children safely


On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

WARNING

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-jure a child in a child restraint systemwhen the airbags are activated. There is arisk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated andthat the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor light lights up.

After installing a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat, make sure that thefront, knee and side airbags on the frontpassenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbagsautomatically, refer to page 165.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint system,move the front passenger seat as far back aspossible and adjust its height to the highestand thus best possible position for the beltand to offer optimal protection in the eventof an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt islocated in front of the belt guide of the childseat, move the front passenger seat care-fully forward until the best possible beltguide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen-ger safety belt can be permanently locked tofasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system withthe safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in andpull it tight against the child restraintsystem. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-pletely.

In some cases it may be necessary to sepa-rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts,refer to page 98.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General informationLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in-formation of the child restraint system man-ufacturer when installing and using LATCHchild restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCHanchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attachthe CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-bined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kgwhen the child is restrained by the internalharnesses.

Seite 109



Safety information

WARNING

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-tive effect of the LATCH child restraintfixing system can be limited. There is arisk of injuries or danger to life. Make surethat the lower anchors are securely en-gaged and that the LATCH child restraintfixing system fits securely against thebackrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbolshows the mounts for thelower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with loweranchors are marked with apair, 2, of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped witha middle seat:

It is not recommended touse the inner lower anchorsof standard outer LATCHpositions to fasten a childrestraint system on themiddle seat. Use the vehiclesafety belt instead for themiddle seat.

Before installing LATCH childrestraint fixing systemsPull the safety belt away from the area ofthe child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraintfixing systems1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors areproperly connected.

Child restraint systems with tetherstrap

Safety information

WARNING

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectlyused for the child restraint system, theprotective effect can be reduced. There isa risk of injury. Make sure that the upperretaining strap is not guided across sharpedges and without twisting to the upperretaining strap.

WARNING

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-tective effect of the child restraint systemis limited or there is none. In particularsituations, for instance braking maneuversor in case of an accident, the rear backrestcan fold forward. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Make sure that the rearbackrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining strapsof child restraint systems are only pro-vided for these retaining straps. Whenother objects are mounted, the anchorscan be damaged. There is a risk of damageto property. Only mount child restraintsystems to the upper retaining straps.

Seite 110

CONTROLS Transporting children safely


Anchors

The respective symbol shows the an-chor for the upper retaining strap.Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found onthe rear seat backrest or the rear windowshelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe anchor1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-ing strap between or along both sides ofthe supports of the head restraint to theanchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap tothe anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling itdown.

Locking the doors and win-dows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-side only.

Safety switch for the rearPress button on the driver's door ifchildren are being transported inthe rear.

This locks various functions so that theycannot be operated from the rear: safetyswitch, refer to page 90.

Seite 111



Driving



Start/Stop button

ConceptPressing the Start/Stop buttonswitches the ignition on or offand starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: theengine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressedwhen you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts withthe clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition onManual transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton without stepping on the clutchpedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brakepedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in theinstrument cluster light up for a variedlength of time.

To save battery power when the engine isoff, switch off the ignition and any unneces-sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition offManual transmission: press the Start/Stopbutton again without stepping on the clutchpedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selectorlever position P, press the Start/Stop buttonagain without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument clustergo out.

To save battery power when the engine isoff, switch off the ignition and any unneces-sary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measuresThe ignition is switched off automatically inthe following situations while the vehicle isstationary and the engine is off:

– When locking the vehicle, and when thelow beams are switched on.

– Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can stillbe started. This function is only availa-ble when the low beams are switchedoff.

– When opening or closing the driverdoor, if the driver's safety belt is un-buckled and the low beams are switchedoff.

– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-led with driver's door open and lowbeams off.

– When the front doors are opened ifthere is no other person sitting in thefront seats.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving


– The low beams switch to parking lightsafter some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission with a tap-operatedselector lever, refer to page 128: whenswitching off the ignition, the selector leverposition P is engaged automatically if theselector lever position R, D or M/S is en-gaged.

Radio-ready state

General informationIn the radio-ready state, certain power con-sumers remain ready for operation.

ActivatingWith the engine running, press the Start/Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignitionis switched on: the system automatically ac-tivates radio-ready state when the door isopened if the lights are switched off or thedaytime running lights are switched on.

The radio-ready state remains active if, forinstance the ignition is automaticallyswitched off for the following reasons:

– Opening or closing the driver's door.

– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

– When automatically switching from lowbeams to parking lights.

Switching off automaticallyThe radio-ready state is switched off auto-matically in the following situations:

– If the driver's or front passenger door isopened when exiting the vehicle, withthe engine switched off manually.

– If the ignition is switched off manuallywith the Start/Stop button.

– After approx. 8 minutes.

– When the vehicle is locked using thecentral locking system.

– Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can stillbe started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gasescan enter into the vehicle. The exhaustgases contain pollutants which are color-less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keepthe exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficientventilation.

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can begin to moveand possibly roll away. There is a risk of anaccident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-cured against rolling away, follow the fol-lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhillslope, turn the front wheels in the di-rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhillslope, also secure the vehicle, for in-stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

In the case of repeated starting attemptsor repeated starting in quick succession,the fuel is not burned or is inadequatelyburned. The catalytic converter can over-

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS


heat. There is a risk of damage to property.Avoid repeated starting in quick succes-sion.

Gasoline engineDepending on the motorization, the fulldrive power may not be available for ap-proximately 30 seconds after starting theengine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac-celerate as usual.


Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.


The ignition is activated automatically for abrief time and is stopped as soon as the en-gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift toneutral.


The ignition is activated automatically for abrief time and is stopped as soon as the en-gine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

WARNING








WARNING






Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving



Switching off the engine1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.



The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.



Auto Start/Stop function

ConceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps savefuel. The system switches off the engineduring a stop, for instance in traffic conges-tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remainsswitched on. The engine starts automati-cally for driving off.

After every start of the engine using theStart/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop func-tion is in the last selected state, refer topage 116. When the Auto Start/Stop func-tion is active, it is available when the vehi-cle is traveling faster than about3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, re-fer to page 186, the system is automaticallyactivated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirementsThe engine is switched off automaticallyduring a stop under the following condi-tions:

Manual transmission:

– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedalis not pressed.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or thedriver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-sition D.

– The brake pedal remains depressedwhile the vehicle is stopped.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or thedriver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brakepedal, engage the selector lever in positionP. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brakepedal. When a gear is engaged, the enginestarts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is re-duced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The display indicates that theAuto Start/Stop function isready for an Automatic enginestart.

The display indicates that theconditions for an automaticengine stop have not beenmet.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS


Functional limitationsThe engine is not switched off automaticallyin the following situations:

– External temperature too low.

– The external temperature is high and au-tomatic climate control is running.

– The car's interior has not yet beenheated or cooled to the required level.

– The engine is not yet at operating tem-perature.

– The wheels are at a sharp angle or thesteering wheel is being turned.

– After driving in reverse.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– At higher elevations.

– The hood is unlocked.

– The parking assistant is activated.

– Stop-and-go traffic.

– Selector lever in selector lever positionR, N or M/S.

Starting the engineThe engine starts automatically under thefollowing conditions:

– Manual transmission: clutch pedal ispressed.

– Steptronic transmission: by releasingthe brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety modeAfter the engine switches off automatically,it will not start again automatically if anyone of the following conditions are met:

– The driver's safety belt is unbuckled andthe driver's door is open.

– The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a variedlength of time.

The engine can only be started via theStart/Stop button.

Functional limitationsEven if driving off was not intended, the de-activated engine starts up automatically inthe following situations:

– Excessive warming of the car's interiorwhen the air conditioning is switchedon.

– The steering wheel is turned.

– Steptronic transmission: change fromselector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

– Steptronic transmission: change fromselector lever position P to R, N, D orM/S.

– The vehicle begins rolling.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– Excessive cooling of the car's interiorwhen the heating is switched on.

– Manual transmission: low brake vacuumpressure; this can occur, for instance ifthe brake pedal is depressed a numberof times in succession.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving


Press button.

– LED comes on: auto Start/Stop functionis deactivated.

The engine is started during an auto-matic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped orstarted via the Start/Stop button.

– LED goes out: auto Start/Stop functionis activated.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehi-cle can be switched off permanently, for in-stance when leaving it.



2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignitionis switched off. The Auto Start/Stopfunction is deactivated.



1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignitionis switched off. The Auto Start/Stopfunction is deactivated.



Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivationIn certain situations, the Auto Start/Stopfunction is deactivated automatically forsafety reasons, for instance if no driver isdetected.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longerswitches off the engine automatically. ACheck Control message is displayed. It is

possible to continue driving. Have the sys-tem checked by a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Parking brake

ConceptThe parking brake is used to prevent the ve-hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

WARNING






WARNING






Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS




Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. Theparking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, theparking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parkingsituations, the parking brake is automati-cally engaged, when selector lever posi-tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-ing brake is released automatically whenyou leave the selector lever position P.

While drivingTo use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehiclebrakes hard while the switch is beingpulled.

The indicator light lights up red, asignal sounds and the brake lightslight up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a completestop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Manual transmission: press theswitch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press theswitch while the brake is pressed or se-lector lever position P is set.


The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars withSteptronic transmissionFor automatic release, step on the accelera-tor pedal.


The parking brake is automatically releasedwhen you step on the accelerator under thefollowing conditions:

– Engine on.

– Drive mode engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manualtransmissionDrive off as usual. The parking brake disen-gages when the clutch pedal is released.


Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving


Under the following conditions, the parkingbrake is automatically released:

– Engine on.

– Gear engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

– Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

MalfunctionIn the event of a failure or malfunction ofthe parking brake, secure the vehicleagainst rolling using a wheel chock, for in-stance when leaving it.

After a power failure

Putting the parking brake intooperation1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping onthe brake pedal or selector lever posi-tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake tobe put into operation. Any sounds associ-ated with this are normal.

The indicator light in the instrumentcluster goes out as soon as the park-ing brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its startingposition after actuation. To switch off man-ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistancepoint.

Triple turn signal activationLightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad-justed.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"


Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point andhold it there for as long as you want theturn signal to flash.

Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS


MalfunctionUnusually rapid flashing of the indicatorlight indicates that a turn signal bulb hasfailed.

High beams, headlight flasherPush the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the lowbeams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-row 2.

Washer/wiper system

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield isdry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the foldedaway state, body parts can be jammed ordamage may occur to parts of the vehicle.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. Make sure that the vehicle isswitched off when the wipers are in thefolded away state and the wipers arefolded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,the wiper blades can be torn off and thewiper motor can overheat when switchingon. There is a risk of damage to property.Defrost the windshield prior to switchingthe wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired positionis reached.

– Resting position of the wipers, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,position 1.

– Normal wiper speed, position 2.

– Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wipersystem switched on: when travel continues,the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving



– Switching off: press the lever down untilit reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down fromthe standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in-itial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

ConceptThe rain sensor automatically controls thetime between wipes depending on the in-tensity of the rainfall.

General informationThe sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-out the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wiperscan accidentally start moving in vehiclewashes. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehiclewashes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standardposition, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper op-eration is deactivated.

DeactivatingPress the lever back into the standard posi-tion.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of therain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of therain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

WARNING

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is a risk of an accident. Onlyuse the washer systems, if the washerfluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid withantifreeze, if needed.

Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS


NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use the washer system when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty.


Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on thewindshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heatedwhenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on the rear window wiperTurn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-verse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear windowTurn the outer switch in the desired direc-tion.

– In resting position: turn the switchdownward, arrow 3. The switch auto-matically returns to its resting positionwhen released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switchfurther, arrow 2. The switch automati-cally returns to its intermittent positionwhen released.

Fold-away position of the wipers

ConceptThe fold-out position enables the wipers tobe folded away from the windshield.

General informationHelpful when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

WARNING


Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving


NOTICE


Folding away the wipers1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper level down, un-til the wipers stop in a close to verticalposition.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away fromthe windshield.

Folding down the wipersAfter the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto thewindshield.


3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers returnto their resting position and are readyagain for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield isdry, as this may damage the wiper blades orcause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

WARNING


NOTICE


Seite 123

Driving CONTROLS


Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or taponce beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initialposition when released.

Switching off and brief wipe


– To switch off from fast wiper speed:press down twice.

– To switch off from normal wiper speed:press down once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initialposition when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

ConceptThe rain sensor automatically controls thetime between wipes depending on the in-tensity of the rainfall.

General informationThe sensor is located on the windshield, di-rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-out the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wiperscan accidentally start moving in vehiclewashes. There is a risk of damage to prop-erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehiclewashes.


Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper op-eration is deactivated.

During trip interruption with the rain sen-sor switched on: if the trip is resumedwithin approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensoris automatically activated again.

Seite 124

CONTROLS Driving


Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of therain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of therain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

WARNING

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is a risk of an accident. Onlyuse the washer systems, if the washerfluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid withantifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,the wash pump cannot work as intended.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use the washer system when thewasher fluid reservoir is empty.


Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on thewindshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzlesThe washer jets are automatically heatedwhenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on the rear window wiperTurn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-verse gear is engaged, the systemswitches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear windowTurn the outer switch in the desired direc-tion.

Seite 125

Driving CONTROLS


– In resting position: turn the switchdownward, arrow 3. The switch auto-matically returns to its resting positionwhen released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switchfurther, arrow 2. The switch automati-cally returns to its intermittent positionwhen released.

Fold-away position of the wipers

ConceptThe fold-out position enables the wipers tobe folded away from the windshield.

General informationHelpful when changing the wiper blades orunder frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

WARNING


NOTICE


Folding away the wipers1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up beyond thepoint of resistance and hold it for ap-prox. 3 seconds, until the wipers remainin a nearly vertical position

3. Fold the wipers all the way away fromthe windshield.

Folding down the wipersAfter the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto thewindshield.


3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers returnto their resting position and are readyagain for operation.

Washer fluid

General informationAll washer nozzles are supplied from onereservoir.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Driving


Use a mixture of tap water and windshieldwasher concentrate. If desired, a windshieldwasher concentrate containing antifreezecan be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

WARNING

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-ful substances and are flammable. There isa risk of fire and a risk of injury. Followthe instructions on the containers. Keepantifreeze away from ignition sources. Donot refill operating materials into differentbottles. Store operating materials out ofreach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and manyindividual states; do not exceed the allow-able washer fluid dilution ratio limits thatapply. Follow the usage instructions on thewasher fluid container.

Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-centrate or the equivalent is recom-mended.

WARNING

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire oncontact with hot engine parts. There is arisk of injury or risk of damage to prop-erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-gine is cooled down. Next, fully close thelid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washerfluid for the water-repelling effect on thewindows can lead to damage to the wash-ing system. There is a risk of damage to

property. Do not add silicon-containing ad-ditives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con-centrates or antifreeze can damage thewashing system. There is a risk of damageto property. Do not mix different wind-shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.Follow the information and mixing ratiosprovided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment.

MalfunctionThe use of undiluted windshield washerconcentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze canlead to incorrect readings at temperaturesbelow +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

Manual transmission

Safety information

WARNING


Seite 127

Driving CONTROLS






NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessivespeeds can damage the engine. There is arisk of damage to property. When shiftinginto 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshiftlever to the right.

Schematic diagram

– 1 – 6: forward gears

– R: reverse

Shifting

General informationDepending on the engine installation, theengine speed during a shifting operation isadjusted automatically as required for har-monious and dynamic gear shifting.

Reverse gearSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and en-gage reverse gear with a forward shiftingmovement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicleIn some situations, the vehicle is to rollwithout its own power, for instance in a ve-hicle wash, or be pushed.


2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift outof a forward gear or reverse.

3. Release the parking brake.


ConceptThe Steptronic transmission combines thefunctions of an automatic transmission withthe possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

WARNING





Seite 128

CONTROLS Driving



Selector lever version

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, atransmission with either a latching selectorlever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-stalled.

Transmission with a latching selectorlever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and Dare selected by moving the selector leverinto the respective selector lever position.The selector lever engages in the selectorlever positions.

Transmission with a tap-operatedselector lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and Dare selected by tapping the selector lever

forward or back. The selector lever automat-ically returns to the center position whenreleased.

Selector lever position P is engaged auto-matically, refer to page 129, in certain sit-uations.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode DSelector lever position for normal vehicleoperation. All gears for forward travel areactivated automatically.

Reverse REngage selector lever position R only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Neutral NThe vehicle may be pushed or roll withoutengine power in selector lever position N,for instance in vehicle washes, refer topage 131.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance forparking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels inselector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure thatselector lever position P is set. Otherwise,the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position for atransmission with a tap-operated selectorlever

Selector lever position P is engaged auto-matically in situations such as the follow-ing:

Seite 129

Driving CONTROLS


– After the engine is switched off whenthe vehicle is in the radio-ready state,refer to page 113, or when the ignitionis switched off, refer to page 112, whileselector lever position R, D or M/S is en-gaged.

– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,the driver's door is opened, and thebrake pedal is not pressed while the ve-hicle is stationary and selector lever po-sition D, M/S or R is engaged.

– After the ignition has been switched offwhile selector lever position N is en-gaged.

Engaging selector lever positions:with a latching selector lever

General informationTo prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode, maintain pressureon the brake pedal until you are ready tostart.

Functional requirementsThe selector lever can only be taken out ofselector lever position P if the ignition is onor the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,R, or PWith the vehicle stationary, depress thebrake pedal before shifting out of selectorlever position P or N; otherwise, the shiftblock will not be deactivated and the shiftcommand will not be executed.

A selector lever lock prevents the followingfaulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selectorlever position P or R.

– Unintentional shifting from selectorlever position P into another selectorlever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: withthe brake pedal depressed, press thebutton on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desiredposition.

Engaging selector lever positions:with a tap-operated selector lever

General informationTo prevent the vehicle from creeping afteryou select a drive mode, maintain pressureon the brake pedal until you are ready tostart.

Functional requirementsOnly when the brake pedal is depressed is itpossible to change from selector lever posi-tion P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, theengine may have to be running too.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Driving


The selection lever position P cannot bechanged until all technical requirements aremet.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,RA selector lever lock prevents the followingfaulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selectorlever position R.

– Unintentional shifting from selectorlever position P into another selectorlever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release theselector lever lock.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,briefly push the selector lever in the de-sired direction, past a resistance point,if needed. The selector lever automati-cally returns to the center position whenreleased.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General informationIn some situations, the vehicle is to rollwithout its own power for a short distance,for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N:with a latching selector lever1. Switch on the ignition.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.


4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-gage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake.

The vehicle may roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not beable to change the selector lever position.

Manually unlock the transmission lock, ifneeded, refer to page 134.

Engaging selector lever position N:with a tap-operated selector lever1. Start the engine while pressing on the

brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.


Seite 131

Driving CONTROLS


4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-gage selector lever position N.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remainsswitched on, and a Check-Control mes-sage is displayed.

The vehicle may roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automaticallyengaged when the ignition is switched off.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot switch ignition off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selectorlever position P is automatically engaged af-ter approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not beable to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock,if needed, refer to page 135.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-ing performance. Step on the acceleratorpedal beyond the resistance point at the fullthrottle position.

Sport program M/S

ConceptThe shifting points and shifting times in theSport program are designed for a sportierdriving style. The transmission, for instanceshifts up later and the shifting times areshorter.

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of se-lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac-tivated.

Ending the Sport programPush the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

ConceptManual gear-shifting is possible in manualmode.

Activating manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left out of

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull itbackward, arrows 2.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Driving


Manual mode M/S becomes active and thegear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-wards.

The Steptronic transmission continuesshifting automatically in certain situations,for instance when certain engine speed lim-its are reached.

With a tap-operated selector lever: whenM2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-tionary, the transmission will no longershift back to M1. This shifting behavior isretained until you engage M1 manually orexit M.

Avoiding automatic upshiftingOnce a particular engine speed is attained,M/S manual mode is automatically up-shifted as needed.

MINI John Cooper Works: once particularengine speeds are attained, upshifting is notautomatically performed in M/S manualmode.

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis-sion, automatic shift operations are not per-formed if one of the following conditions ismet:

– DSC is deactivated.

– TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting forkickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version,the lowest possible gear can be selected bysimultaneously activating kickdown and op-erating the left shift paddles. This is notpossible by switching briefly via the shift

paddles from selector lever position D tomanual mode M/S.

Ending the manual modePush the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sporttransmission

ConceptThe shift paddles on the steering wheel al-low you to shift gears quickly while keepingboth hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en-gine and road speeds, for instance down-shifting is not possible if the engine speedis too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating ashift paddle switches into manual modetemporarily.

After conservative driving in manual modewithout acceleration or shifting via the shiftpaddles for a certain amount of time, thetransmission switches back to automaticmode.

It is possible to switch into automatic modeas follows:

– Pull and hold right shift paddle.

– In addition to the briefly pulled rightshift paddle, briefly pull the left shiftpaddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shiftpaddle switches into manual mode perma-nently.

Seite 133

Driving CONTROLS


Shifting

– To shift up: briefly pull right shift pad-dle.

– To shift down: briefly pull left shift pad-dle.

– The lowest possible gear can be selectedby pulling and holding the left shift pad-dle.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in theinstrument cluster, followed by the currentgear.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position isdisplayed, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lockmanually: with a latching selectorleverIf the selector lever is locked in selectorlever position P despite the ignition beingswitched on, the brake pedal being de-pressed and the button on the selector leverbeing pressed, the transmission lock can beunlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lockmanually, set the parking brake to preventthe vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-gether with the lower retaining ring,

from the center console. To do so, pullthe retaining ring upward at the rearedge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec-tor, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboardvehicle tool kit, refer to page 287, pressthe yellow release lever downward, seearrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the se-lector lever and move the selector leverback slightly.

Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desiredposition.

For additional information, see the chapteron tow-starting and towing.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Driving


Releasing the transmission lockelectronically: with a tap-operatedselector lever

General informationElectronically unlock the transmission lockto maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, setthe parking brake to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position NUnlocking is possible, if the starter can spinthe engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The startermust audibly start.

3. Press the button on the selector lever,arrow 1, and press and hold the selectorlever into selector lever position N, ar-row N, until selector lever position N isdisplayed in the instrument cluster.


4. Release the selector lever.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starterstops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the dangerarea and secure it against moving on itsown.

For additional information, see the chapteron tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission:Launch Control

ConceptLaunch Control enables optimum accelera-tion on surfaces with good traction underdry surrounding conditions.

General informationThe use of Launch Control causes prema-ture component wear since this functionrepresents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during thebreak-in, refer to page 238, period.

To start with Launch Control do not steerthe steering wheel.

Functional requirementsLaunch Control is available as soon as theengine and transmission are at operatingtemperature.

Depending on the external temperature anddriving style, the engine and transmissionrequire an interrupted trip of up to30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-ating temperature needed for Launch Con-trol.

Start with launch controlWhile the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORTwith the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRAC-TION in combination with SPORT. TheDSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press downon the brake.

4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond theresistance point at the full throttle posi-tion, kickdown.

Seite 135

Driving CONTROLS


A flag symbol is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts.Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

Repeated use during a tripAfter Launch Control has been used, thetransmission must cool down for approx.5 minutes before Launch Control can beused again.

After using Launch ControlTo increase vehicle stability, activate DSCDynamic Stability Control again.

System limitsAn experienced driver may be able to ach-ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFFmode.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Driving


Displays




Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Tachometer 142

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 142

5 Display/reset miles 142

6 Electronic displays 138

Seite 137

Displays CONTROLS


Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 143

External temperature 143

Selection lists 147

Total miles/trip odometer 142

Onboard Computer 147

2 Selector lever position 128

Gear shift indicator 145

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-tus 186

Check Control

ConceptThe Check Control system monitors func-tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-functions in the monitored systems.

General informationA Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lightsand SMS text messages in the instrumentcluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-put and a SMS text message may appear onthe Control Display.


General informationThe indicator/warning lights can light up ina variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily whenthe engine is started or the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Displays


Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi-nated: safety belt on the driver orpassenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated ifobjects are placed on the front passengerseat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi-tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner arenot working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-ately by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

Release the parking brake, refer topage 118.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continueto drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-ately by a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center orrepair shop.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advancewarning is issued, for example whenthere is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicleahead is too small.

Increase distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of theimminent danger of a collision when the ve-hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-tively high differential speed.

Intervention by braking or make an evasivemaneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a person detectedin this way is imminent, the symbollights up and a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selecteddistance from the vehicle drivingahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer topage 189.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehiclehas been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi-tions are not adequate for the system towork.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

Braking force boost may not beworking. Avoid abrupt braking. Takethe longer braking distance into ac-count.

Have the system immediatelychecked by a dealer’s service center

Seite 139

Displays CONTROLS


or another qualified service center or repairshop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-trols the drive and braking forces.The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to thedriving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer’s serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 184.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isdeactivated or DTC Dynamic TractionControl is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-vated.

DSC, refer to page 184, and DTC, re-fer to page 185.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The Flat Tire Monitor signals a lossof tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau-tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steeringmaneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 172.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light lights up: the TirePressure Monitor reports a low tireinflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol-

low the information in the Check Controlmessage.

The indicator light flashes and then contin-uously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tireinflation pressure can be detected.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-ces with the same radio frequency: afterleaving the area of the interference, thesystem automatically becomes activeagain.

– TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronicsis mounted: have it checked by a deal-er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have the system checkedby a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 167.

Steering system

Steering system in some cases notworking.

Have the system checked by a deal-er’s service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.Have the vehicle checked as soonas possible.

– The warning light flashes under certaincircumstances:

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a briefperiod can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular thecatalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer topage 286.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays


Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 119.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights areswitched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlightcontrol, refer to page 157.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 160.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and offautomatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 159.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main-tains the speed that was set usingthe control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 120.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press and hold button on signal lever.

Continuous displaySome Check Control messages are displayedcontinuously and are not cleared until themalfunction is eliminated. If several mal-functions occur at once, the messages aredisplayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-played again automatically.

Temporary displaySome Check Control messages are hiddenautomatically after approx. 20 seconds. TheCheck Control messages are stored and canbe displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check ControlmessagesVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS


Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control messageis displayed or is stored.

SMS text messagesSMS text messages in combination with asymbol in the instrument cluster explain aCheck Control message and the meaning ofthe indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messagesAdditional information, such as on thecause of an error or the required action, canbe called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text willbe automatically displayed on the ControlDisplay.

Further help

Depending on the Check Control message,further help can be selected.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the desired text message.


– "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information aboutthe Check Control message in theIntegrated Owner's Manual.

– "Service request"

Contact a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center orrepair shop.

– "MINI Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Messages after trip completionSpecial messages displayed while drivingare displayed again after the ignition isswitched off.

Fuel gauge

The arrow beside the fuelpump symbol shows whichside of the vehicle the fuelfiller flap is on.

Vehicle tilt position may causethe display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 252.

The yellow indicator light illumi-nates, once the fuel reserve isreached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the redwarning field. In this range, the fuel supplyis reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

ConceptThe total number of kilometers driven andthe number of kilometers driven since thelast reset are displayed in the instrumentcluster.

Reset the trip odometerPress the button.

– The odometer is displayedwhen the ignition isswitched off.

Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays


– When the ignition is switched on, thetrip odometer is reset.

External temperature

General informationIf the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-nal sounds.


There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

WARNING

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-stance on bridges or shady sections ofroad. There is a risk of an accident. Modifyyour driving style to the weather condi-tions at low temperatures.

DisplayThe external temperature isdisplayed in the instrumentcluster.

Time

The time is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

The time can be set via theCentral Information Display(CID).

Date

The date is displayed in the in-strument cluster.

The date can be set via theCentral Information Display(CID).

Range

General informationWith a low remaining range:

– A Check Control message is displayedbriefly.

– The remaining range is shown on theOnboard Computer.

– With a dynamic driving style, for in-stance taking curves aggressively, theengine function is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears contin-uously below a range of approx.30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than30 miles/50 km the engine may no longerhave sufficient fuel. Engine functions arenot ensured anymore. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Refuel promptly.

DisplayThe current range is displayedin the instrument cluster.

Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS


Displaying the cruising rangeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

ConceptDisplays the current fuel consumption.Check whether you are currently driving inan efficient and environmentally-friendlymanner.

Displaying the current fuelconsumptionVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Current consumption"

Service requirements

ConceptThe function displays the service require-ments and the corresponding maintenancescopes.

General informationAfter the ignition is switched on the instru-ment cluster briefly displays available driv-

ing distance or time to the next scheduledmaintenance.

A service advisor can read out the currentservice requirements from your remote con-trol.

Display

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the type of service re-quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-play.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures andlegally mandated inspections are dis-played.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-mation.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re-quired.

The deadline for scheduledmaintenance or a legallymandated inspection is ap-proaching.

The service deadline has al-ready passed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the mandatory vehicleinspections.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Displays


Make sure that the vehicle's date and timeare set correctly.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"


Automatic Service RequestData regarding the service status or legallymandated vehicle inspections is automati-cally transmitted to your dealer’s servicecenter before your vehicle is due for serv-ice.

You can check when your dealer’s servicecenter was notified.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

ConceptThe system recommends the most fuel effi-cient gear for the current driving situation.

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment andcountry version, the gear shift indicator isactive in the manual mode of the Steptronictransmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift gear up or down aredisplayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

ConceptSpeed Limit Info shows the current maxi-mum permitted speed in the instrumentcluster.

General informationThe camera at the base of the interior mir-ror detects traffic signs at the edge of theroad as well as variable overhead sign posts.Traffic signs with extra symbols for wetroad conditions, etc., are also detected andcompared with the vehicle's onboard data,such as from the rain sensor, and will bedisplayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the systemtakes into account the information stored inthe navigation data and also displays speedlimits present on routes without signs.

Seite 145

Displays CONTROLS


Without a navigation system, the system issubject to limitations imposed by technol-ogy. Traffic signs with speed limitations aredetected and displayed only. Speed limita-tions due to entering or exiting towns, high-way signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed lim-its with extra text characters are alwaysdisplayed.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing visibility and traffic situation.There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv-ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traf-fic closely and actively intervene whereappropriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interiormirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interiormirror clean and clear.

DisplaySpeed Limit Info is displayed via the On-board Computer.

Press button on the turn signal lever severaltimes, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed on the InfoDisplay in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

Without a navigation systemthe traffic signals are grayedout after curves or longerstretches of roadway.

With navigation system:Speed Limit Info is not availa-ble.

Without navigation system:no speed limit or cancellationis detected.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in thefollowing situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-fall.

– When signs are fully or partially con-cealed by objects, stickers or paint.

Seite 146

CONTROLS Displays


– When driving very close to the vehiclein front of you.

– When driving toward bright lights orstrong reflections.

– When the windshield in front of the in-terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-ered by a sticker, etc.

– In the event of incorrect detection bythe camera.

– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-tion system are incorrect.

– In areas not covered by the navigationsystem.

– When roads differ from the navigation,such as due to changes in road routing.

– When passing buses or trucks with aspeed sticker.

– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

– When signs that are valid for a parallelroad are detected.

– During calibration of the camera imme-diately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, thebuttons on the steering wheel and the dis-play in the instrument cluster can be usedto display or use the following:

– Current audio source.

– Redial phone feature.

– Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

Button on thesteering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selectiondown.

Confirm the selec-tion.

Display

Onboard Computer

ConceptThe Onboard Computer displays differentvehicle data in the instrument cluster, suchas average values.

Seite 147

Displays CONTROLS


Calling up information on the InfoDisplay


Information is displayed in the Info Displayof the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Info Display

Repeatedly pressing the but-ton on the turn signal levercalls up the following informa-tion in the Info Display:

– Range.

– GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

– Average consumption, fuel.

– Current consumption, fuel.

– Average speed.

– Date.

– Engine temperature display.

– With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation:

Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activatedin the navigation system.

– With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation:

Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activatedin the navigation system.

– Speed Limit Info.

– Speed.

The unit of some information can bechanged.

Setting units, refer to page 55.

Selecting informationDepending on the vehicle equipment, youcan select what information from the On-board Computer can be displayed on theInfo Display of the instrument cluster.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"




Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range avail-able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv-ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN infoThe achieved range extension may be dis-played as a bonus range.

Average fuel consumptionThis is calculated for the period while theengine is running.

The average fuel consumption is calculatedfor the distance traveled since the last resetby the Onboard Computer.

Seite 148

CONTROLS Displays


Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked withthe engine manually stopped are not in-cluded in the calculation of the averagespeed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold button on turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

Displays the current engine temperature,based on a combination of coolant and en-gine oil temperature. As soon as the opti-mum operating temperature has been at-tained, the indicator is in the centerposition.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is toohigh, a red indicator light is dis-played.

When the engine oil temperature istoo high, a red indicator light is dis-played.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 283.

Display

With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation: distance todestinationThe distance remaining to the destination isdisplayed if a destination is entered in thenavigation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adoptedautomatically.

With equipment version with Head-upDisplay and navigation: time of arrivalThe estimated time of arrival is displayed ifa destination is entered in the navigationsystem before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Speed Limit InfoSpeed Limit Info shows the current maxi-mum permitted speed in the instrumentcluster.

Onboard Computer on the ControlDisplay

ConceptThe Onboard Computer displays differentvehicle data on the Control Display, such asaverage values.

Seite 149

Displays CONTROLS


General informationTwo types of Onboard Computers are availa-ble on the Control Display:

– "Onboard info": average values, such asthe fuel consumption, are displayed. Thevalues can be reset individually.

– "Trip computer": the values deliver anoverview of a certain distance and canbe reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer ortrip computerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard ComputerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, ifneeded.

– "Reset": all values are reset.

– "Automatic reset": all values arereset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

ConceptOn the Control Display, sport instrumentscan be displayed, and the vehicle state canbe checked before the use of the SPORTprogram.

Sport instruments

General informationOn the Control Display, values for powerand torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instrumentsVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle stateThe following vehicle and surrounding areadata is automatically checked and evaluatedin succession:

– Range.

– Engine temperature.

– External temperature.

– SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehiclestate is displayed.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Displays


Checking vehicle stateVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Sport displays"

4. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warning

ConceptA speed limit can be set that when reachedwill cause a warning to be issued.

General informationThe warning is repeated if the vehicle speedexceeds the set speed limit again, after ithas dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing thespeed warningVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desiredspeed is displayed.


Activating/deactivating the speedwarningVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as thespeed warningVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in-strument cluster

ConceptThe LED ring displays light animations torepresent specific functions.

Basic displaysBasic functions, for instance the tachome-ter, can be set to be displayed continually ifso desired.

Event displaysFunctions that are only displayed tempora-rily, for instance the volume or temperaturesettings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions canalso be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-play corresponds with the displays of thefunction in the respective display.

Seite 151

Displays CONTROLS


Example: tachometerLike the tachometer in the instrument clus-ter, the light animations of the tachometer'sbasic display show the current RPMs andthe respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

– Arrow 1: current RPM.

– Arrow 2: prewarning field.

– Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ringVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"


Adjusting the LED ringVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Basic display" or "Event display"


Setting the brightnessThe brightness can be adjusted when nightlighting is active in the instrument cluster.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"






Head-up Display

ConceptThis system projects important informationinto the driver's field of vision, for instancethe speed.

The driver can get information withoutaverting his or her eyes from the road.

General informationFollow the instructions for cleaning theHead-up Display. For additional informa-tion, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

WARNING

When extending and retracting the projec-tion screen of the Head-up Display, bodyparts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movementof the projection screen is clear duringopening and closing.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Displays


NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitivecomponents that can easily be scraped ordamaged. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Do not place any objects on theHead-up Display, attach to system compo-nents or plug into the system. Do notmove the moving parts manually.

Overview

Switching the Head-up Displayon/offWhen switching on, the projection lens ofthe Head-up Display is extended. Whenswitching off, the projection lens of theHead-up Display is retracted again.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"


Display

OverviewThe following information is displayed onthe Head-up Display:

– Speed.

– Navigation instructions.

– Check Control messages.

– Selection list from the instrument clus-ter.

– Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Displayed information"

6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.


Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted tothe ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Brightness"



When the low beams are switched on, thebrightness of the Head-up Display can beadditionally influenced using the instru-ment lighting, refer to page 161.

Seite 153

Displays CONTROLS



Adjusting the heightVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Height"

6. Turn the Controller until the desiredheight is reached.



The height of the Head-up Display can alsobe stored using the memory function, referto page 102.

Setting the rotationThe screen of the Head-up Display can berotated around its own axis.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Rotation"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is selected.



Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-upDisplay is influenced by the following fac-tors:

– Certain sitting positions.

– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-play.

– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-ters.

– Wet roads.

– Unfavorable light conditions.

John Cooper Works: sport dis-plays in the Head-up Display

General informationThe sport displays in the Head-up Displayassist with a sporty driving style.

Switching onVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "Displayed information"

6. "Sport displays"

With navigation system: if the sport dis-plays are switched on, no navigation con-tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-play.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Displays


Display

1 Speed

2 Shift point indicator

3 Gear display

4 Current engine speed

5 Warning field, speed

Shift point indicator

ConceptShift point indicator in the Head-up Displayindicates the optimum shifting point. Thus,with a sporty driving style, the best possiblevehicle acceleration is achieved.

Functional requirements– Steptronic Sport transmission:

Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy-namic Traction Control DTC are acti-vated.

– Press the accelerator pedal all the waydown.

DisplaySuccessive gray illuminated fields indicatethe upcoming shift moment.

Shift up immediately when the red fieldslight up.

When the maximum possible speed isreached, the entire display flashes. The fuelsupply is reduced to protect the engine.

Country timer

ConceptThe system provides information on howlong and to what degree the vehicle wasdriven on inclined, uneven, unpaved orsnow-covered roads, for example.

General informationThe system consists of the following twomenus:

– Country Timer: display of the gradientand unevenness of the routes traveled.

– Country Timer Info: display of the besttime and total time since the last reset.

Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads,refer to page 241.

Opening the menuVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "MINI Country Timer"


– : display of the Country Timer.

– : display of the Country TimerInfo.

Display of the Country Timer

Overview

Seite 155

Displays CONTROLS


– Symbols for road gradient and uneven-ness, arrow 1.

– Category, arrow 2.

– Pulse value, arrow 3.

Symbols, pulse deflection and pulsevalueWhen the vehicle is being driven on in-clined or uneven roads, the correspondingsymbol lights up, arrow 1. One or morepulse deflections are displayed and thepulse value increases, arrow 3.

CategoriesAs the pulse value increases, the vehicle be-comes larger and reaches various levels, ar-row 2.

Display of the Country Timer Info

Best timeThe shortest driving time necessary toreach the highest level.

Total timeThe total driving time that the vehicle wasdriven at the highest level.

Resetting the Country Timer InfoVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "MINI Country Timer"

3. "MINI Country Timer Info"


– "Reset record time and display": re-setting the best time.

– "Reset total time": resetting the totaltime.

Vehicle status

General informationThe status can be displayed and actions per-formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle statusVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance– "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat

Tire Monitor, refer to page 172.

– "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of theTire Pressure Monitor, refer topage 167.

– "Engine oil level": Electronic en-gine oil level check, refer to page 279.

– "Check Control": Check Control mes-sages are stored in the background andcan be displayed on the Control Display.Displaying stored Check Control mes-sages, refer to page 141.

– "Service required": Displaying serv-ice requirements, refer to page 144.

– "Teleservice Call": service request.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Displays


Lights



Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next tothe steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Rear fog light.

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Symbol Function

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams androadside parking lights

General informationPosition of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni-tion is switched off, the exterior lighting isautomatically switched off.

Parking lightsPosition of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extendedperiods; otherwise, the battery may becomedischarged and it would then be impossibleto start the engine.

Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer topage 158.

Low beamsPosition of switch:

Seite 157

Lights CONTROLS


The low beams light up when the ignition isswitched on.

Canada: roadside parking light

ConceptThe vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, pressthe lever either up or down past the resist-ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistancepoint in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and headlightcourtesy delay feature

Welcome lights

General informationDepending on the vehicle equipment andthe ambient brightness, individual lightfunctions may be switched on briefly whenthe vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivatingPosition of switch: ,


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"


5. "Welcome lights"


Headlight courtesy delay feature

General informationThe low beams stay illuminated for a partic-ular time if the high beams are switched onafter radio-ready state is switched off.

Canada: the low beams stay illuminated fora particular time if the headlight flasher isswitched on after radio-ready state isswitched off.

Setting the durationVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"


5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.


Automatic headlight control

ConceptThe low beams are switched on and off au-tomatically depending on the ambientbrightness, for instance in tunnels, in twi-light or if there is precipitation.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Lights


General informationA blue sky with the sun low on the horizoncan cause the lights to be switched on.

ActivatingPosition of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument clusteris illuminated when the low beams areswitched on.

System limitsThe automatic headlight control cannotserve as a substitute for your personal judg-ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de-tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-tions, switch the light on manually.

Daytime running lights

General informationPosition of switch: , ,

The daytime running lights light up whenthe ignition is switched on. After the igni-tion is switched off, the parking lights lightup in position .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lightsare mandatory, so it may not be possible todeactivate the daytime running lights.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"



Settings are stored for the remote controlcurrently used.

Cornering light

General informationPosition of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain-ous roads or when turning, an additional,cornering light is switched on that lights upthe inside of the curve when the vehicle ismoving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automaticallyswitched on depending on the steering an-gle or the use of turn signals.

Adaptive headlight range con-trol

The adaptive headlight range control com-pensates for acceleration and braking oper-ations in order not to blind the oncomingtraffic and to achieve optimum illuminationof the roadway.

High-beam Assistant

ConceptThe high-beam Assistant detects other traf-fic participants early on and automaticallyswitches the high beams on or off depend-ing on the traffic situation.

General informationThe high-beam Assistant ensures that thehigh beams are switched on, whenever thetraffic situation allows. In the low speedrange, the high beams are not switched onby the system.

The system responds to light from oncom-ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,and to ambient lighting, for instance intowns and cities.

Seite 159

Lights CONTROLS


The high beams can be switched on and offmanually at any time.


Position of switch, depending on the vehicleequipment: ,


The indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the lowbeams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switchedbetween low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the sys-tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivatedwhen manually switching the high beamson and off, refer to page 120.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limitsThe high-beam Assistant cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver's personal judg-ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-uation that require this, therefore switch offmanually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol-lowing situations, and driver interventionmay be necessary:

– In very unfavorable weather conditions,such as fog or heavy precipitation.

– When detecting poorly-lit road userssuch as pedestrians, cyclists, horsebackriders and wagons; when driving closeto train or ship traffic; or at animalcrossings.

– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-sions, in cross traffic or half-obscuredoncoming traffic on highways.

– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

– When the windshield in front of the in-terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

ConceptThe front fog lights work alongside the lowbeams to illuminate a wider area of theroadway.

Functional requirementThe low beams must be switched on beforeswitching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The green indicator light lights up ifthe front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer topage 158, is activated, the low beams willcome on automatically when you switch onthe front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasherare activated, the front fog lights are notswitched on.

Seite 160

CONTROLS Lights


Instrument lighting

Functional requirementThe parking lights or low beams must beswitched on to adjust the brightness.

SettingsAdjust the brightness with thethumbwheel.

Interior lights

General informationDepending on the equipment, the interiorlights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-tesy lights are controlled automatically.

Thumbwheel for the instrument lightingcontrols brightness of some of these fea-tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/offPress button.

To switch off permanently: press the buttonand hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on andoff manually

Press button.

The reading lights are located in the frontnext to the interior light.

Ambient light

General informationDepending on the equipment version, light-ing can be adjusted for some lights in thecar's interior.

Activating/deactivatingVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"



Changing color

Push the switch forward or back:manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back-ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,until the ambient light illuminates

Seite 161

Lights CONTROLS


several times: automatic color change. Pushthe switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightnessDepending on the equipment, the bright-ness of the ambient light can be adjustedvia the thumbwheel for the instrumentlighting or on the Control Display.


1. "My MINI"


3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Lights


Safety




Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver andthe front passenger by responding to frontalimpacts in which safety belts alone wouldnot provide adequate protection.

Side airbagIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supportsthe side of the body in the chest and laparea.

Seite 163

Safety CONTROLS


Head airbagIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Ejection MitigationThe head airbag system is designed as anejection mitigation countermeasure to re-duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicleoccupants through side windows duringrollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a fron-tal impact.

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impactsituation, for instance in less severe acci-dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of theairbags

WARNING

If the seat position is incorrect or the de-ployment area of the airbags is impaired,the airbag system cannot provide protec-tion as intended and may cause additionalinjuries due to triggering. There is a riskof injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-formation on achieving the optimum pro-tective effect of the airbag system.

– Keep a distance from the airbags.

– Always grasp the steering wheel on thesteering wheel rim. Hold your hands atthe 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, tokeep the risk of injury to your hands orarms as low as possible when the airbagis triggered.

– Make sure that the front passenger issitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and doesnot support them on the dashboard.

– Make sure that occupants keep theirheads away from the side airbag.

– There should be no additional persons,animals or objects between an airbagand a person.

– Dashboard and windshield on the frontpassenger side must stay clear - do notattach adhesive labels or coverings anddo not attach brackets or cables, for in-stance for GPS devices or mobilephones.

– Do not apply adhesive materials to theairbag cover panels, do not cover themor modify them in any way.

– Do not use the cover of the front airbagon the front passenger side as a storagearea.

– Do not place slip covers, seat cushionsor other objects on the front passengerseat that are not specifically suited forseats with integrated side airbags.

– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-jects on the front seats that are not spe-cifically suited for seats with integratedside airbags.

– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

– Never modify either the individual com-ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-tem. This also applies to steering wheelcovers, the dashboard, and the seats.

– Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions veryclosely, injury from contact with the airbagscannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-tions.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporaryhearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

Seite 164

CONTROLS Safety


tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-formation.

Warnings and information on the airbagsare also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

Safety information

WARNING

Individual components can be hot aftertriggering of the airbag system. There is arisk of injury. Do not touch individualcomponents.

WARNING

Improperly executed work can lead to fail-ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-ing of the airbag system. In the case of amalfunction, the airbag system might nottrigger as intended despite the accidentseverity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-ger to life. Have the airbag systemchecked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-ped by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on,the warning light in the instrumentcluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of theentire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning– Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

– The warning light lights up continu-ously.

Automatic deactivation of thefront-seat passenger airbags

ConceptThe system reads if the front passenger seatis occupied by measuring the human body'sresistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the frontpassenger's side are activated or deacti-vated.

General informationBefore transporting a child on the front pas-senger seat, refer to the safety informationand instructions for children on the frontpassenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

WARNING

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbagfunction, the system must be able to de-tect whether a person is sitting in thefront passenger seat. The entire seat cush-ion area must be used for this purpose.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the front passenger keepshis or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children andadults, the front-seat passenger airbags maybe deactivated in certain sitting positions.In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position sothat the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags,have the person sit in the rear.

Seite 165

Safety CONTROLS


To enable correct recognition of the occu-pied seat cushion.

– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball matsor other items to the front passengerseat unless they are specifically deter-mined to be safe for use on the frontpassenger seat.

– Do not place any electronic devices onthe front passenger seat if a child re-straint system is to be installed on it.

– Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

– No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seatpassenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen-ger airbags indicates the operating state ofthe front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags areeither activated or deactivated.

– The indicator light lightsup when a child is properlyseated in a child restraintsystem or when the seat isempty. The airbags on thefront passenger side arenot activated.

– The indicator light does not light upwhen, for instance a correctly seatedperson of sufficient size is detected onthe seat. The airbags on the front pas-senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systemsThe system generally detects childrenseated in a child restraint system, particu-larly in child restraint systems required byNHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-cle was manufactured. After installing achild restraint system, make sure that theindicator light for the front-seat passengerairbags lights up. This indicates that thechild restraint system has been detectedand the front-seat passenger airbags are notactivated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbagThe explosive power that activates driver's/front-seat passenger airbags very much de-pends on the positions of the driver's/frontpassenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this functionover the long-term, calibrate the front seatsas soon as a relevant Check Control mes-sage is displayed. A message also appearson the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

WARNING


An appropriate Check Control message isdisplayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for-ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again.The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-tion.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Safety


The calibration procedure is completedwhen the Check Control message disap-pears.

If the message continues to be displayed,repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re-peat calibration, have the system checkedas soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

ConceptThe system monitors tire inflation pressurein the four mounted tires. The system warnsyou if there is a significant loss of pressurein one or more tires.

General informationSensors in the tire valves measure the tireinflation pressure and, depending on themodel, the tire temperature.

With use of the system follow further infor-mation found under Tire inflation pressure,refer to page 256.

Functional requirementsThe following conditions must be met forthe system; otherwise, reliable flagging of aloss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-set was performed with the correct tireinflation pressure.

– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-justed to a new value, a reset was per-formed.

– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current statusThe system status can be displayed on theControl Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-tem is active.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General informationTire and system status are indicated by thecolor of the wheels and a SMS text messageon the Control Display.

All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning re-lated to the tire inflation pressures storedduring the last reset.

One to four yellow wheelsA flat tire or major drop in the tire inflationpressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheelsIt may not be possible to identify tire infla-tion pressure losses.

Possible causes:

– Malfunction.

– The system is being reset.

Additonal informationThe status control display additionallyshows the current tire inflation pressures. Itshows the actual values read; they may varydepending on driving style or weather con-ditions.

Seite 167

Safety CONTROLS


Resetting the systemVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using"Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and thefollowing is displayed "Resetting TirePressure Monitor…".

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/hfor a short period, the set tire inflation pres-sures are accepted as reference values. Theresetting process is completed automati-cally while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, thetires appear in green on the Control Displayand "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See labelfor recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time.When you continue the reset resumes auto-matically.

Messages

General informationA low tire inflation pressure may cause theDSC Dynamic Stability Control to beswitched on.

Safety information

WARNING

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-dling, such as steering and braking re-sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limitedstability. There is a risk of an accident. Donot continue driving if the vehicle is

equipped with normal tires. Follow the in-formation on run-flat tires and continueddriving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check isrequired

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message ap-pears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected awheel change, but no reset wasdone.

No reset was performed for thesystem. The system issues awarning based on the tire infla-tion pressures stored during thelast reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac-cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure hasfallen below the level of the lastreset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct asneeded.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminatedin the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Controlmessage appears on the Control Display.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Safety



There is a tire inflation pressureloss.


Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-ately. Do not exceed a speed of80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gasstation, check and correct the tire infla-tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tireinflation pressure

Message


In addition, a symbol with the affected tireappears in a Check Control message on theControl Display.


There is a flat tire or a majorloss in tire inflation pressure.


Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 264, are la-beled with a circular symbol containingthe letters RSC marked on the tire'ssidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-sure in all four tires, for instance usingthe tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all fourtires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-tor may not have been reset. In thiscase, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all fourtires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitormay not have been initialized. In thiscase, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage isnot possible, please contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tirekit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tirekit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.In this case, have the electronics checkedand replaced at the next opportunity.

Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS


Run-flat tires

Safety information

WARNING

Your vehicle handles differently with arun-flat with no or low inflation pressure;for instance, your lane stability whenbraking is reduced, braking distances arelonger and the self-steering properties willchange. There is a risk of an accident.Drive moderately and do not exceed aspeed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damagedtire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires at the next opportunity.


Possible driving range with adepressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible todrive safely varies depending on how thevehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, roadconditions, external temperature. The driv-ing range may be less but may also be moreif an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an averageweight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe todrive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire willhandle differently, potentially leading toconditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving offcourse.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abruptsteering maneuvers or driving over obsta-cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving canindicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

System limits

TemperatureThe tire inflation pressure depends on thetire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increasethe tire's temperature, thus increasing thetire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced whenthe tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warningwhen temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure lossThe system cannot indicate sudden serioustire damage caused by external circumstan-ces.

Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety


Failure to perform a resetThe system does not function properly if areset has not been carried out, for instancea flat tire is reported though tire inflationpressures are correct.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning light flashes andis then illuminated continuously. ACheck Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres-sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol-lowing situations:

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics,for instance an emergency wheel, ismounted: have it checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have system checked by adealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

– The system was unable to complete thereset. Perform a system reset again.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-ces with the same radio frequency: afterleaving the area of the interference, thesystem automatically becomes activeagain.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure MonitoringSystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.) As an added safety

feature, your vehicle has been equippedwith a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-nates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-dling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale. Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-tor to indicate when the system is not oper-ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-cator is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a mal-function, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain contin-uously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehicle start-upsas long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-functions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation of replace-ment or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one ormore tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-sure that the replacement or alternate tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS


FTM Flat Tire Monitor

ConceptThe system detects tire inflation pressureloss on the basis of rotation speed differen-ces between the individual wheels whiledriving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,the diameter and therefore the rotationalspeed of the corresponding wheel changes.The difference will be detected and reportedas a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in-flation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirementsThe following conditions must be met forthe system; otherwise, reliable flagging of aloss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-tialization was performed with the cor-rect tire inflation pressure.

– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-justed to a new value, an initializationwas performed.

Status displayThe current status of the flat tire monitorcan be displayed, for instance whether theRPA is active.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization requiredAn initialization must be performed in thefollowing situations:

– After the tire inflation pressure hasbeen adjusted.

– After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initializationWhen initializing, the set tire inflationpressures serve as reference values in orderto detect a flat tire. Initialization is startedby confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when drivingwith snow chains.


1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Performreset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv-ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continueswhen driving resumes.

Messages

General informationWhen a flat tire is indicated, DSC DynamicStability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

WARNING

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-dling, such as steering and braking re-sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limitedstability. There is a risk of an accident. Donot continue driving if the vehicle isequipped with normal tires. Follow the in-

Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety


formation on run-flat tires and continueddriving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire


In addition, a symbol with a Check Controlmessage appears on the Control Display.


There is a flat tire or a majorloss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 264, are la-beled with a circular symbol containingthe letters RSC marked on the tire'ssidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-sure in all four tires, for instance usingthe tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.



If identification of flat tire damage isnot possible, please contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tirekit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tirekit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.In this case, have the electronics checkedand replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

WARNING


Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damagedtire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires at the next opportunity.


Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS


Possible driving range with adepressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible todrive safely varies depending on how thevehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, roadconditions, external temperature. The driv-ing range may be less but may also be moreif an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an averageweight and used under favorable conditions,the distance for which it may be safe todrive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire willhandle differently, potentially leading toconditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving offcourse.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abruptsteering maneuvers or driving over obsta-cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving canindicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci-dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

System limitsThe system could be delayed or malfunctionin the following situations:

– A natural, even tire inflation pressureloss in all four tires will not be recog-nized. Therefore, check the tire inflationpressure regularly.

– Sudden serious tire damage caused byexternal circumstances cannot be recog-nized in advance.

– When the system has not been initial-ized.

– When driving on a snowy or slipperyroad surface.

– Sporty driving style: spinning tractionwheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-ing).

– When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

ConceptIntelligent Safety enables central operationof the driver assistance system.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre-vent an imminent collision.

– Approach control warning with Citylight braking function, refer topage 175.

– Person warning with City light brakingfunction, refer to page 179.

Safety information

WARNING


Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety


WARNING

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system mightnot output warnings or reactions or thesemight be output late, incorrectly, or with-out justification. There is a risk of an acci-dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch traffic closely and activelyintervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functionscan malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systemsactivated. There is a risk of an accident.Switch all Intelligent Safety systems offprior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/offSome Intelligent Safety systems are auto-matically active after every departure. SomeIntelligent Safety systems activate accord-ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the intelligentsafety system is displayed. Thesystems are individuallyswitched off according to theirrespective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-tive to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settingsare stored for the driver profile currently inuse.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systemsare switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systemsare switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Approach control warningwith city light braking func-tion

ConceptThe system can help prevent accidents. Ifan accident cannot be prevented, the sys-tem will help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im-minent collision and activates brakes inde-pendently, if needed.

The automatic braking intervention is donewith limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirrorcontrols the system.

The approach control warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.

Seite 175

Safety CONTROLS


With the vehicle approaching another vehi-cle intentionally, the approach control warn-ing and braking are delayed in order toavoid false system reactions.

General informationThe system warns at two levels of an immi-nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings mayvary with the current driving situation.

Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of upto 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect aretaken into account.

Safety information

WARNING


WARNING

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system mightnot output warnings or reactions or thesemight be output late, incorrectly, or with-out justification. There is a risk of an acci-dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-tions. Watch traffic closely and activelyintervene where appropriate.

WARNING


Overview



Seite 176

CONTROLS Safety


Camera



Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after ev-ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually





Press button again:



Hold down button:



Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via the CentralInformation Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"


3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"


The selected warning time is stored for thedriver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

DisplayA warning symbol appears in the instru-ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if acollision with a detected vehicle is immi-nent.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarn-ing.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and anacoustic signal sounds: acutewarning.

Brake and make an evasive ma-neuver, if necessary.

PrewarningThis warning is issued, for instance whenthere is the impending danger of a collisionor the distance to the vehicle ahead is toosmall.

The driver must intervene actively whenthere is a prewarning.

Seite 177

Safety CONTROLS


Acute warning with braking functionAcute warning is displayed in case of theimminent danger of a collision when the ve-hicle approaches another object at a highdifferential speed.

The driver must intervene actively whenthere is an acute warning. If necessary, thedriver is assisted by a minor automaticbraking intervention in a possible risk ofcollision.

Acute warnings can also be triggered with-out previous forewarning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver to react.During a warning, the maximum brakingforce is used. Prerequisite for the brakebooster is sufficiently quick and sufficientlyhard stepping on the brake pedal. If there isa risk of collision, the system may assistwith braking.When the vehicle is travelingat a low speed, the vehicle may come to acomplete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in-tervention up to a complete stop, the enginemay be shut down.

The braking intervention occurs only if ve-hicle stability has not been restricted,for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-namic Stability Control.

The driver may cancel the braking interven-tion by stepping on the accelerator pedal orby actively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Followthe limitations of the detection range andfunctional restrictions.

System limits

Safety information

WARNING

The system can react not at all, too late, in-correctly, or without justification due tothe system limits. There is a risk of acci-dents or risk of damage to property. Followthe information regarding the system lim-its and actively intervene if needed.

Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come ormight come late.

E.g., the following situations may not be de-tected:

– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-proach them at high speed.

– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in frontof you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-ance.

– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:


– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or thewindshield are dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systemsare deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of theengine via the Start/Stop button.


Seite 178

CONTROLS Safety


– If there are constant blinding effects be-cause of oncoming light, for instancefrom the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settingsare, the more warnings are displayed.Therefore, there may also be an excess ofpremature or unjustified warnings and reac-tions.

Person warning with Citylight braking function

ConceptThe system can help prevent accidents withpedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the systemwill issue a warning if there is imminentrisk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir-ror controls the system.

General informationWith sufficient brightness, the systemwarns about possible collision danger withpedestrians starting at approx.6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/hand assists with braking before a collision.

The system reacts to people who are withinthe detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle isdivided into two areas:

– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front ofthe vehicle.

– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right andleft of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-cated within the central area. A warning isissued about pedestrians who are locatedwithin the extended area only if they aremoving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

WARNING


WARNING

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver’s personal judg-ment. Due to its limits, the system mightnot output warnings or reactions or thesemight be output late, incorrectly, or with-out justification. There is a risk of an acci-dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-

Seite 179

Safety CONTROLS


tions. Watch traffic closely and activelyintervene where appropriate.

WARNING


Overview



Camera



Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after ev-ery driving off.

Switching on/off manually





Press button again:



Hold down button:



Warning with braking function

DisplayIf a collision with a person detected in thisway is imminent, a warning symbol appearson the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and asignal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking ormake an evasive maneuver.

Seite 180

CONTROLS Safety


Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver to react.During a warning, the maximum brakingforce is used. Prerequisite for the brakebooster is sufficiently quick and sufficientlyhard stepping on the brake pedal. If there isa risk of collision, the system may assistwith braking.When the vehicle is travelingat a low speed, the vehicle may come to acomplete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking in-tervention up to a complete stop, the enginemay be shut down.

The braking intervention occurs only if ve-hicle stability has not been restricted,for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-namic Stability Control.

The driver may cancel the braking interven-tion by stepping on the accelerator pedal orby actively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Followthe limitations of the detection range andfunctional restrictions.

System limits

Safety information

WARNING


Detection rangeThe detection potential of the camera is lim-ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or beissued late.

E.g., the following situations may not be de-tected:

– Partially covered pedestrians.

– Pedestrians that are not detected assuch because of the viewing angle orcontour.

– Pedestrians outside of the detectionrange.

– Pedestrians having a body size less than32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional ormay not be available in the following situa-tions:




– If the driving stability control systemsare deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of theengine via the Start/Stop button.


– If there are constant blinding effects be-cause of oncoming light, for instancefrom the sun low in the sky.

– When it is dark outside.

Brake force display

ConceptAdditional brake lights indicate emergencybraking to the traffic behind. This can re-duce the risk of a rear-end collision.

Seite 181

Safety CONTROLS


General information

– During normal brake application, thebrake lights light up.

– During heavy brake application, theflashers additionally light up.

Alertness assistant

ConceptThe system can detect decreasing alertnessor fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-nous trips, for instance on highways. In thissituation, it is recommended that the drivertakes a break.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing one's physical state. An increasinglack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-tected or not be detected in time. There isa risk of an accident. Make sure that thedriver is rested and alert. Adjust drivingstyle to traffic conditions.

FunctionThe system is switched on each time the en-gine is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system monitorscertain aspects of the driver's behavior, sothat decreasing alertness or fatigue can bedetected.

This procedure takes the following criteriainto account:

– Personal driving style, for instancesteering behavior.

– Driving conditions, for instance lengthof trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,the system is active and can display a rec-ommendation to take a break.

Break recommendationIf the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,a message is displayed in the Control Dis-play with the recommendation to take abreak.

A recommendation to take a break is dis-played only once during an uninterruptedtrip.

After a break, another recommendation totake a break cannot be displayed until afterapproximately 45 minutes.

System limitsThe function may be limited in the follow-ing situations, for instance and will eitheroutput an incorrect warning or no warningat all:

– When the clock is set incorrectly.

– When the vehicle speed is mainly belowabout 43 mph/70 km/h.

– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-ing rapid acceleration or when corner-ing fast.

– In active driving situations, such aswhen changing lanes frequently.

– When the road surface is poor.

– In the event of strong side winds.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Safety


The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-ter parking the vehicle, for instance in thecase of a break during longer trips on high-ways.

PostCrash – iBrake

ConceptIn the event of an accident, the system canbring the vehicle to a halt automaticallywithout intervention by the driver in cer-tain situations. This can reduce the risk of afurther collision and the consequencesthereof.

At standstillAfter coming to a halt, the brake is releasedautomatically. Secure the vehicle againstrolling.

Harder vehicle brakingIt can be necessary to bring the vehicle incertain situations to a halt quicker.

To do this, for a short time the braking pres-sure applied when stepping on the brakepedal must be higher than the braking pres-sure achieved by the automatic brakingfunction. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic brakingIt can be necessary to interrupt automaticbraking in certain situations, for instancefor an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

– By pressing the brake pedal.

– By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 183

Safety CONTROLS


Driving stability control systems



Anti-lock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.

The vehicle maintains its steering powereven during full brake applications, thus in-creasing active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start theengine.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-ing capability to the furthest possible ex-tent. It reduces the braking distance to aminimum during emergency stop. This sys-tem utilizes all of the capabilities providedby the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brakepedal for the duration of the emergencystop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

ConceptWithin the physical limits, the system helpsto keep the vehicle on a steady course byreducing engine speed and by applyingbrakes to the individual wheels.

General informationDSC detects the following unstable drivingconditions, for instance:

– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-ing.

– Loss of traction of the front wheels,which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer topage 185, is a version of the DSC where for-ward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic situation. Based on thelimits of the system, it cannot independ-ently react to all traffic situations. There isa risk of an accident. Adjust driving styleto traffic conditions. Watch traffic closelyand actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

When driving with a roof load, for in-stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-ping in critical driving situations. There isa risk of accidents or risk of damage to

Seite 184

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems


property. Do not deactivate DSC DynamicStability Control when driving with roofload.

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator light flashes: DSC con-trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC hasmalfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General informationWhen DSC is deactivated, driving stabilityis reduced during acceleration and whendriving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but notlonger than approx. 10 seconds, un-til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicatorlight go out.

Indicator/warning lightsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC isdeactivated.

Automatic activationWhen DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-tion occurs in the following situations:

– The vehicle has a flat tire.

– When activating cruise control inTRACTION or DSC OFF mode.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con-trol

ConceptDTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-ity Control where forward momentum is op-timized.

The system ensures maximum headway onspecial road conditions, for instance unp-lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle hasmaximum traction. Driving stability is lim-ited during acceleration and when drivingin curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activateDTC under the following special circum-stances:

– When driving in slush or on uncleared,snow-covered roads.

– When driving off from deep snow orloose ground.

– When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTCDynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press button.

Seite 185

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS


TRACTION is displayed in the instrumentcluster and the indicator light for DSC OFFlights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility ofthe vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels arebraked individually when a sporty drivingstyle is used.

ALL4

ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of yourvehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSCDynamic Stability Control further optimizestraction and driving dynamics. The ALL4all-wheel-drive system variably distributesthe driving forces to the front and rear axlesas demanded by the driving situation androad surface.

Adaptive chassis

ConceptThe tuning of the suspension can bechanged with the system.

The system offers several different pro-grams.

The programs are selected via the MINIDriving Modes switch.

Programs

MID/GREENBalanced tuning of the shock absorbers formore comfort.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the shock ab-sorbers for greater driving agility.

MINI Driving Modes switch

ConceptThe MINI Driving Modes switch helps tofine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switchwill activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

MINI Driving Modes switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MIDMID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti-vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

ConceptGREEN, refer to page 244, provides consis-tent tuning to maximize range.

Seite 186



Activating GREENPress the MINI Driving Modes switchdownward until GREEN is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved whenGREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Driving mode"



This configuration is retrieved whenGREEN is activated.

SPORT

ConceptConsistently sporty tuning of the drivetrainfor greater driving agility.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, thetuning of the chassis and suspension alsochanges and SPORT can be individuallyconfigured.

The configuration is stored for the driverprofile currently in use.

Activating SPORTPress the MINI Driving Modes switch up-ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

Configuring SPORTVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure SPORT"


This configuration is retrieved when SPORTis activated.

Configuring driving programSettings can be made for the following driv-ing programs in Driving mode:

– GREEN, refer to page 186.

– SPORT, refer to page 187.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI DrivingModes switch displays a list ofprograms, which can be se-lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis-plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

ConceptThis system supports driving off on uphillgrades. The parking brake is not required.

Seite 187

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS


Driving off with the drive-offassistant1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive offwithout delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicleis held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent powersteering function.

The system provides the steering force withmore support at low speeds than at higherones. This makes it easier to park, for in-stance, and makes steering more directwhen driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-cording to the driving program, so that a di-rect, sporty feel or a comfortable steeringresponse is conveyed.

Seite 188



Driving comfort



Camera-based cruise control

ConceptUsing this system, a desired speed and adistance to a vehicle ahead can be adjustedusing the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed onclear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac-celerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle sothat the set distance to the vehicle ahead ismaintained. The speed is adjusted as far asthe given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in severalsteps. For safety reasons, it depends on therespective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: if the vehicle ahead of youbrakes to a halt, and then proceeds to driveagain shortly thereafter, the system is ableto detect this within the given system lim-its.

General informationA camera on the interior mirror is used todetect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the driving settings, the fea-tures of the cruise control can change incertain areas.

Safety information

WARNING


WARNING

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-justed or called up by mistake. There is arisk of an accident. Adjust the desiredspeed to the traffic conditions. Watch traf-fic closely and actively intervene whereappropriate.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-ferences to other vehicles, for instance inthe following situations:

– When fast approaching a slowly mov-ing vehicle.

– Vehicle suddenly swerving into ownlane.

– When fast approaching standing ve-hicles.

Seite 189

Driving comfort CONTROLS


There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.Watch traffic closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

WARNING






Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer topage 191.

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 191.

Pause cruise control, refer topage 191.

Continue cruise control with thelast setting, refer to page 192.

Reduce distance, refer topage 192.

Increase distance, refer topage 192.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer topage 191.

Reduce speed, refer to page 191.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle'sseries, optional features and country speci-fications.

Camera




Speed rangeThe system is best used on well-constructedroads.

The system is functional at speeds begin-ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: the system can also be acti-vated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is85 mph/140 km/h.

Manual transmission: Active Cruise Controlis interrupted below a speed of approx.20 mph/30 km/h. The system does notbrake to a stop.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Driving comfort


Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument clusterlights up.

Display in the instrument clusterlights up. The current speed isadopted as desired speed and dis-

played with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains theset speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switchedon, if necessary.

Switching offWith the Stop&Go function for Steptronictransmissions: when switching off whilestationary, depress the brake pedal simulta-neously.

Press the button on the steeringwheel.

The displays go out. The stored desiredspeed is deleted.

Interrupting manually


With the Stop&Go function for Step-tronic transmissions: when interruptingwhile stationary, depress the brake pedal si-multaneously.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is automatically interrupted inthe following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– Manual transmission: when the clutchpedal is depressed for a few seconds orreleased while a gear is not engaged.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-venes.

– If the detection range of the camera isimpaired, for instance by soiling, heavyprecipitation or glare effects from thesun.

– Manual transmission: if the vehicle infront decelerates below a speed of ap-prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.

– With the Stop&Go function for Step-tronic transmissions: following a sta-tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-ter the vehicle was braked to a stop bythe system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speedPress or button in the interruptedstate.

When the system is switched on, the cur-rent speed is maintained and stored as thedesired speed.

The stored speed is displayed on thesymbol.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isswitched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

Seite 191



If active, the displayed speed is stored andthe vehicle reaches the stored speed whenthe road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressedpast the resistance point, the desiredspeed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat theaction.

Adjusting distance

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment. Due tothe system limits, braking can be late.There is a risk of accidents or risk of dam-age to property. Be aware to the traffic sit-uation at all times. Adjust the distance tothe traffic and weather conditions andmaintain the prescribed safety distance,possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayedin the left part of the instrumentcluster.

Increase distance

Press button repeatedly until thedesired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayedin the left part of the instrumentcluster.

Continuing cruise control

General informationAn interrupted cruise control can be contin-ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-rent speed and stored speed is not too largebefore calling up the stored speed. Other-wise, unintentional braking or acceleratingmay occur.

In the following cases, the stored speedvalue is deleted and cannot be called upagain:

– When the system is switched off.

– When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up stored speed and distance

Press button with the system inter-rupted. Cruise control is continuedwith the stored values. The selected

distance is briefly displayed in the Info Dis-play.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

WARNING

The system does not react to traffic driv-ing ahead of you, but instead maintainsthe stored speed. There is a risk of acci-dents or risk of damage to property. Adjustthe desired speed to the traffic conditionsand brake as needed.

Seite 192



Switching distance control offDistance control can be switched off and onwhen driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrumentcluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, pressone of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, aCheck Control message is displayed.


Desired speed and stored speed

In addition to the indicator light, thedesired speed is displayed in the InfoDisplay.

– Display lights up green: system is active,the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-terrupted, the display indicates thestored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible thatthe conditions necessary for operation arenot currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youSelected distance from the vehicle drivingahead is briefly displayed in the left handportion of the Info Display.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af-ter the system is switched on.

Detected vehicle

Symbol lights up orange:

A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

With the Stop&Go function for Step-tronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehiclehas driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-vate ACC as follows:

– By briefly pressing the acceleratorpedal.

– By pressing the RES CNCL button.

– By pressing the or button.


Symbol flashes orange:

The conditions are not adequate forthe system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Seite 193



Symbol flashes red and a signalsounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu-ver, if necessary.

The system has been interrupted ordistance control is temporarily sup-pressed because the accelerator

pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not de-tected.

Distance control is temporarily sup-pressed because the acceleratorpedal is being pressed; a vehicle was

detected.

Displays in the Head-up DisplayThe information from Active Cruise Controlcan also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-play.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system andthe automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance mightnot be detected.

DecelerationThe system does not decelerate in the fol-lowing situations:

– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarlyslow-moving road users.

– For red traffic lights.

– For cross traffic.

– For oncoming traffic.

– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-ing lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-tected until it is completely within the samelane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenlyswerves into your lane, the system may notbe able to automatically restore the selecteddistance. It may not be possible to restorethe selected distance in certain situations,including if you are driving significantlyfaster than vehicles driving ahead of you,for instance when rapidly approaching atruck. When a vehicle driving ahead of youis reliably detected, the system requeststhat the driver intervene by braking andcarrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With the Stop&Go function forSteptronic transmissions: driving offIn some situations, the vehicle cannot driveoff automatically; for example:

– On steep uphill grades.

– From bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the acceleratorpedal.

Seite 194



Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve,the speed is reduced slightly, althoughcurves cannot be anticipated in advance.Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropri-ate speed.

The system has a limited detection range.Situations can arise in tight curves where avehicle driving ahead will not be detectedor will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system maybriefly report vehicles in the next lane dueto the bend of the curve. If the system de-celerates you may compensate it by brieflyaccelerating. After releasing the acceleratorpedal the system is reactivated and controlsspeed independently.

WeatherThe following restrictions can occur underunfavorable weather or light conditions:

– Poorer vehicle recognition.

– Short-term interruptions for vehiclesthat are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or lightconditions:

– Wet conditions.

– Snowfall.

– Slush.

– Fog.

– Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the currenttraffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-tively, for instance by braking, steering orevading.

Engine powerThe desired speed may not be maintainedon uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-cient.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed if thesystem fails or was automatically deacti-vated.

The system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:

– When an object was not correctly de-tected.




– When driving toward bright lights.

– Up to 20 seconds after the start of theengine, via the Start/Stop button.


Seite 195



Cruise control

ConceptUsing this system, a desired speed can beadjusted using the buttons on the steeringwheel. The system maintains the desiredspeed. The system accelerates and brakesautomatically as needed.

General informationThe system is functional at speeds begin-ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the driving settings, the fea-tures of the cruise control can change incertain areas.

Safety information

WARNING


WARNING

The use of the system can lead to an in-creased risk of accidents in the followingsituations, for instance:

– On winding roads.

– In heavy traffic.

– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, orwet conditions, or on a loose roadsurface.

There is a risk of accidents or risk of dam-age to property. Only use the system ifdriving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer topage 196.

Store speed, refer to page 197.

Pause cruise control, refer topage 196.

Continue cruise control with thelast setting, refer to page 197.

Increase speed, refer topage 197.

Reduce speed, refer to page 197.

Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching on


The indicator light in the instrumentcluster lights up.

The current speed is adopted as thedesired speed and is displayed withthe symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains theset speed.


Switching off


Seite 196



The displays go out. The stored desiredspeed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button onthe steering wheel.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is automatically interrupted inthe following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– If the clutch pedal is depressed for a fewseconds or released while a gear is notengaged.

– If the gear engaged is too high for thecurrent speed.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Controlis deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speedPress or button in the interruptedstate.

When the system is switched on, the cur-rent speed is maintained and stored as thedesired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.


The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored andthe vehicle reaches the stored speed whenthe road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressedto the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressedpast the resistance point, the desiredspeed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

– or button: pressing it to the re-sistance point and holding it acceleratesor decelerates the vehicle without re-quiring pressure on the acceleratorpedal. After the button is released, thevehicle maintains its final speed. Press-ing the switch beyond the resistancepoint causes the vehicle to acceleratemore rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General informationAn interrupted cruise control can be contin-ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-rent speed and stored speed is not too largebefore calling up the stored speed. Other-wise, unintentional braking or acceleratingmay occur.

Calling up stored speed


The stored speed is reached again and main-tained.

Seite 197




Indicator light

Depending on how the vehicle isequipped, the indicator light in theinstrument cluster indicates whether

the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

The desired speed is displayed to-gether with the symbol.

– Display lights up green: system isactive, the display indicates thedesired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-terrupted, the display indicates thestored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible thatthe conditions necessary for operation arenot currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine powerThe desired speed is also maintained down-hill, but may not be maintained on uphillgrades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

ConceptPDC is a support when parking. The systemdetects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects infront of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-jects that you are approaching slowly are in-dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General informationThe ultrasound sensors for measuring thedistances are located in the bumpers.

The maneuvering range, depending on ob-stacles and environmental conditions, is ap-prox. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-lowing situations:

– By the front middle sensors and the twocorner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cmfrom the object.

– By the rear middle sensors at ap-prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

– When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic situation. There is a riskof an accident. Adjust driving style to traf-fic conditions. Watch traffic and vehiclesurroundings closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

WARNING

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-tance Control is activated, the warning canbe delayed due to physical circumstances.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. Avoid approaching an objecttoo fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDCPark Distance Control is not yet active.

Seite 198



Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of thePDC, for instance in the bump-ers.

Functional requirementsEnsure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance withstickers, bicycle racks.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-structed.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system switches on automatically in thefollowing situations:

– If selector lever position R is engagedwhen the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-tected behind or in front of the vehicleby PDC and the speed is slower than ap-prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-stacle detection can be switched off. Via theCentral Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": dependingon the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro-file currently used.

Automatic deactivation duringforward travelThe system switches off when a certaindriving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/offmanually

Press park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed ifthe reverse gear is engaged when pressingthe park assistance button.

WARNING

Signal tonesWhen approaching an object, an intermit-tent sound indicates the position of the ob-ject. E.g., if an object is detected to the leftrear of the vehicle, a signal tone soundsfrom the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, theshorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is lessthan approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuoustone is sounded.

Seite 199



With front PDC: if objects are simultane-ously located both in front of and behindthe vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec-tor lever position P is engaged on vehicleswith Steptronic transmission.

VolumeThe ratio of the PDC signal tone volume tothe entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"


3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.


Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display. Objectsthat are farther away are already displayedon the Control Display before a signalsounds.

A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented incolors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera isdisplayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

WARNING


Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not functionunder the following circumstances:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-sound, for instance from passing vehi-cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions suchas high relative humidity, wet condi-tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strongwind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings ofother vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects suchas ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharpedges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

Seite 200



– Low objects already displayed, for in-stance curbs, can move into the blindarea of the sensors before or after a con-tinuous tone sounds.

False warningsThe system may issue a warning under thefollowing conditions even though there isno obstacle within the detection range:

– In heavy rain.

– When sensors are very dirty or coveredwith ice.

– When sensors are covered in snow.

– On rough road surfaces.

– On uneven surfaces, such as speedbumps.

– In large buildings with right angles andsmooth walls, for instance in under-ground garages.

– In automatic vehicle washes.

– Due to heavy exhaust.

– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-stance sweeping machines, high pres-sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a contin-uous tone alternating between the frontand rear speakers. As soon as the mal-function due to other ultrasound sourcesis no longer present, the system is againfully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-stacle detection, for instance in vehiclewashes; see Switching on/off.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and therange of the sensors is dimmed onthe Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked bya dealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

ConceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. Thearea behind the vehicle is shown on theControl Display.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgment in as-sessing the traffic situation. There is a riskof an accident. Adjust driving style to traf-fic conditions. Watch traffic and vehiclesurroundings closely and actively inter-vene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment:button in the vehicle


Seite 201



Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle ofthe tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is switched on automatically ifselector lever position R is engaged whenthe engine is running.

Automatic deactivation duringforward travelThe system switches off when a certaindriving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment:switching on/off manually


– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shownon the Control Display.

Switching the view via the CentralInformation Display (CID)If the rearview camera view is not dis-played, change the view via the Central In-formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement– The rearview camera is switched on.

– The tailgate is fully closed.

– Keep the recording range of the cameraclear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems andtrailers that are not connected to atrailer power socket can lead to malfunc-tions.

Activating assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can beactive at the same time.

– Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

– Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on thevehicle equipment.

Seite 202



Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on theimage of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate thespace required when parking and maneu-vering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steer-ing angle and are continuously adjusted tothe steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposedon the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of thesmallest possible turning radius on a levelroad.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af-ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-cle markings can be faded into the image ofthe rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-ings match the markings of the PDC ParkDistance Control.

Parking using pathway and turningradius lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits ofthe parking space.

Seite 203



2. Turn the steering wheel to the pointwhere the pathway line covers the cor-responding turning radius line.

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:


2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is reached and press the Controller.

ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:


2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles or high, protruding ob-jects such as ledges may not be recognizedby the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, someassistance functions also consider data fromthe PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park DistanceControl chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis-play may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from theobjects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parkingparallel to the road.

General informationParking assistant handling is divided intothree steps:

– Switching on and activating.

– Parking space search.

– Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the bestpossible parking line and takes control ofsteering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on requiredactions are displayed on the Control Dis-play.

A component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control.

Seite 204



Safety information

WARNING


NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicleover or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Watch traffic closely andactively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-tance Control applies in addition.

Overview



Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-ing.


Ultrasound sensorsEnsure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance withstickers.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-structed.

For measuring parking spaces– Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space– Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Gap between two objects with a mini-mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Min. length of gap between two objects:your vehicle's length plus approx.3.3 ft/1.0 m.

– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking– Doors and tailgate are closed.

Seite 205



– The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on thedriver's side, the corresponding turn sig-nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button


The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking spacesearch is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati-cally.

Switching on with reverse gearShift into reverse.

The current status of the parking spacesearch is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not availa-ble.

White: the system is availablebut not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and systemstatus

– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-ing assistant is activated and the park-ing space search is active.

– Control Display shows suitable parkingspaces at the edge of the road next tothe vehicle symbol. When the parkingassistant is active, suitable parkingspaces are highlighted.

– The parking procedure isactive. Steering controlhas been taken over bysystem.

– Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardslow and straight, even if the system isdeactivated. When the system is deacti-vated, the displays on the Control Dis-play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button orshift into reverse gear to switch on theparking assistant, refer to page 206. Ac-tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at aspeed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

Seite 206



and at a distance of maximum5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space searchand possible parking spaces are dis-played on the display, refer to page 206.

3. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position willcome after gear change on the station-ary vehicle - wait for the automaticsteering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is in-dicated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, ifneeded.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted atany time:

– Press park assistance button.

– "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically inthe following situations:

– If the driver grasps the steering wheelor takes over steering.

– If a gear is selected that does not matchthe instruction on the display.

– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.6 mph/10 km/h.

– Possibly on snow-covered or slipperyroad surfaces.

– If a maximum number of parking at-tempts or the time taken for parking isexceeded.

– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-plays clearances that are too small.

– When switching into other functions ofthe radio.


ResumingAn interrupted parking procedure can becontinued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer topage 206, and follow the instructions on thedisplay.

Switching offThe system can be switched off as follows:

– Press park assistance button.

– Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

WARNING


No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assis-tance in the following situations:


Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional inthe following situations:

– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravelroads.

– On slippery ground.

– With accumulations of leaves/snow inthe parking space.

– With a mounted emergency wheel.

Seite 207



– With ditches or edges, for instance anedge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not functionunder the following circumstances:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-sound, for instance from passing vehi-cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions suchas high relative humidity, wet condi-tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strongwind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings ofother vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects suchas ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharpedges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-stance curbs, can move into the blindarea of the sensors before or after a con-tinuous tone sounds.

– The parking assistant may identify park-ing spaces that are not suitable for park-ing.

Tire sizeThe parking position may vary dependingon the tire size.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-tem checked by a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Seite 208



Climate control



Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved bythe following components:

– Emission tested car's interior.

– Microfilter.

– Air conditioning system to control thetemperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

– Automatic climate control.

– Parked-car ventilation.

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow

Seite 209

Climate control CONTROLS


3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 97

5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 97

Climate control functions in detail


Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow allthe way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on theset temperature.

Settings

Turn the ring to set the de-sired temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooledand dehumidified and, depending on thetemperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled withthe engine running.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshieldmay fog up briefly when the engine isstarted.

The air conditioner produces condensationwater, refer to page 241, that will exit frombelow the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tem-porarily suspending the supply of outsideair. The system then recirculates the airflow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press button repeatedly to select anoperating mode:

– LED off: outside air flows in continu-ously.

– LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup-ply of outside air into the vehicle is per-manently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-lated-air mode switches off automatically af-ter a certain amount of time, depending onthe external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates andthe fogging of the windows increases.

Seite 210

CONTROLS Climate control


If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-lated-air mode and increase the air flow, ifneeded.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-justed manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, themore effective the heating orcooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may bereduced automatically to save batterypower.

Controlling the air distributionmanually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control canbe adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select thedesired program or the desiredintermediate setting.

– Windows.

– Upper body region.

– Floor area.

– Windows, upper body region, andfloor area.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensationMake the following settings to defrost thewindows and remove condensation:

– Direct the air distribution onto the win-dows.

– Increasing the air flow.

– Increase the temperature.

– Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press button. The LED lights up.

The front window defrosterswitches off automatically after a certainperiod of time.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster switchesoff automatically after a certain period oftime.

For permanent activation, press the buttonfor longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti-vated continuously at an external tempera-ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heateroutput is reduced.

MicrofilterIn external and recirculated-air mode themicrofilter filters dust and pollen from theair.

Have this filter changed during vehiclemaintenance, refer to page 285.

Seite 211



Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 97

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 Defrosting windows and removing con-densation

15 Seat heating, left 97

Climate control functions in detail


Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to theleft until the control switchesoff.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves theset temperature as quickly as possible, if

Seite 212



necessary by using the maximum cooling orheating power, and then keeps it constant.

Settings

Turn the ring to set the de-sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between differenttemperature settings. The automatic climatecontrol will not have sufficient time to ad-just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooledand dehumidified and, depending on thetemperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled withthe engine running.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshieldmay fog up briefly when the engine isstarted.

The air conditioning is switched on auto-matically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 241, de-velops and drains underneath the vehicle.This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature,maximum air flow and recirculated-airmode.

General information

The function is available with external tem-peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ andwith the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper bodyregion. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the airflow active.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with thesystem switched on.

The system is set to the lowest temperature,optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates orheats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature arecontrolled automatically depending on thetemperature in the car's interior and the de-sired temperature setting including the se-lected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with theAUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature,AUTO intensity and outside influences, the

Seite 213



air is directed to the windshield, side win-dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

The following features are switched on au-tomatically with the AUTO program:

– The air conditioning, refer to page 213.

To switch off the program: press the buttonagain or manually adjust the air distribu-tion.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the au-tomatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the de-sired intensity from soft to in-tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi-tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

Concept

The automatic recirculated-air control AUCrecognizes odors or pollutants in the out-side air. The outside air supply is shut offand the interior air is recirculated.

General information

If the system is activated, a sensor detectspollutants in the outside air and controls theshut-off automatically.

If the system is deactivated, outside air con-tinuously flows into the car's interior.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates andthe fogging of the windows increases.

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-tants in the immediate environment by tem-porarily suspending the supply of outsideair. The system then recirculates the airflow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off

Press button repeatedly to select anoperating mode:

– LEDs off: outside air flows in continu-ously.

– Left LED on, automatic recirculated-aircontrol: a sensor detects pollutants inthe outside air and shuts off automati-cally.

– Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle ispermanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-lated-air mode switches off automatically af-ter a certain amount of time, depending onthe external temperature.

If windows are fogged over, switch off therecirculating mode and press the AUTO but-ton. Make sure that air can flow to thewindshield.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-justed manually.

General information

To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTOprogram first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the de-sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayedvia illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con-trol may be reduced automatically to savebattery power.

Seite 214



Controlling the air distributionmanually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control canbe adjusted manually.

Operation

Press button repeatedly to select aprogram:

– Windows, upper body region, and floorarea.

– Upper body region and floor area.

– Floor area.

– Windows and floor area.

– Windows.

– Windows and upper body region.

– Upper body region.

Defrosting windows and removingcondensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removedfrom the windshield and the front side win-dows.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with thesystem switched on.

Ice and condensation are quickly removedfrom the windshield and the front side win-dows.

The air flow can be adjusted with the airflow active.

If there is window condensation, switch onthe air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster


The front window defrosterswitches off automatically after a certainperiod of time.

Rear window defroster


The rear window defroster switchesoff automatically after a certain period oftime.

For permanent activation, press the buttonfor longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti-vated continuously at an external tempera-ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heateroutput is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterIn external and recirculated-air mode themicrofilter/activated charcoal filter filtersdust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out ofthe air.

Have this filter changed during vehiclemaintenance, refer to page 285.

Ventilation

SettingThe air flow directions can be individuallyadjusted:

– Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto theperson. The air flow heats or cools no-ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-perature.

– Indirect ventilation:

Seite 215



If the vents are fully or partly closed, theair is directly routed into the car's inte-rior.

Front ventilation

– Turn knob for continuous opening andclosing of the vents.

– Swivel the vents to alter the direction ofthe vent flow, arrows.

Ventilation in the rear

– Lever for changing the air flow direc-tion, arrow 1.

– Thumbwheel for variable opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 2.

Parked-car ventilation

ConceptThe parked-car ventilation ventilates thecar's interior and lowers its temperature, ifneeded.

General informationThe parked-car ventilation can be switchedon and off directly or by using two presetactivation times. The system remainsswitched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is oper-ated via the Central Information Display(CID).

Functional requirements– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-

ready state.

– Direct operation or preset activationtime: does not depend on external tem-perature.

– Battery is sufficiently charged.

If parked-car ventilation is switched on,the vehicle battery will be discharged.Thus, limit the maximum activation timeto save the vehicle battery. The systemwill be available again after the engineis started or after a short trip.

– Make sure that the vehicle's date andtime are set correctly.

– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directlyVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


Seite 216




4. "Comfort ventilation"

5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation timeVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"



4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol lights up when the activation time isactivated.

The symbol on the automatic climatecontrol flashes when the system has beenswitched on.

The system will only be switched on withinthe next 24 hours. After that, it needs to bereactivated.

Seite 217



Interior equipment



Integrated Universal RemoteControl

ConceptThe integrated Universal Remote Control inthe interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-tions of remote-controlled systems, such asgarage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-tems. The integrated Universal Remote Con-trol replaces up to 3 different hand-heldtransmitters. To operate the remote control,the buttons on the interior mirror must beprogrammed with the desired functions.The hand-held transmitter for the particularsystem is required in order to program theremote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operatingremote-controlled systems, such as the ga-rage door, using the integrated UniversalRemote Control. There is a risk of injury or

risk of damage to property. Make sure thatthe area of movement of the respectivesystem is clear during programming andoperation. Also follow the safety informa-tion of the hand-held transmitter.

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the pack-aging or in the owner's manual of thesystem to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integratedUniversal Remote Control.

If you have any questions, please contact:

– A dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

– www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-tex Corporation.

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Seite 218

CONTROLS Interior equipment


Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons onthe interior mirror simultaneously forapproximately 20 seconds until the LEDon the interior mirror flashes. Thiserases all programming of the buttonson the interior mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for thesystem to be controlled approx. 1 to3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the but-tons of the interior mirror. The requireddistance depends on the hand-heldtransmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the but-ton of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to beprogrammed on the interior mirror. TheLED on the interior mirror will beginflashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LEDflashes more rapidly. The LED flashingfaster indicates that the button on theinterior mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distancebetween the interior mirror and thehand-held transmitter and repeat thestep. Several more attempts at differentdistances may be necessary. Wait atleast 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior mirror button and re-peatedly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. To program other functions on otherbuttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the in-terior mirror buttons.

Special feature of the rolling codewireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system af-ter repeated programming, please check ifthe system to be controlled features a roll-ing code radio system.

Read the system's owner's manual, or pressthe programmed button on the interior mir-ror longer. If the LED on the interior mirrorstarts flashing rapidly and then stays litconstantly for 2 seconds, the system fea-tures a rolling code radio system. Flashingand continuous illumination of the LED willrepeat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys-tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-trol and the system also have to besynchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find outhow to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of asecond person.

Synchronizing the universal remote controlwith the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte-rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-ton on the system being programmed.You have approx. 30 seconds for thenext step.

4. Hold down the programmed button onthe interior mirror for approximately3 seconds and then release it. If neces-sary, repeat this step up to three timesin order to finish synchronization. Oncesynchronization is complete, the pro-grammed function will be carried out.

Seite 219

Interior equipment CONTROLS


Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the interior mirror LEDstarts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to becontrolled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to8 cm away from the buttons of the inte-rior mirror. The required distance de-pends on the hand-held transmitter.

4. Likewise, press and hold the button ofthe desired function on the hand-heldtransmitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the in-terior mirror LED flashes more rapidly.The LED flashing faster indicates thatthe button on the interior mirror hasbeen programmed. The system can thenbe controlled by the button on the inte-rior mirror.

If the LED does not flash faster after atmost 60 seconds, change the distanceand repeat the programming startingwith step 4. Several more attempts atdifferent distances may be necessary.Wait at least 15 seconds between at-tempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior mirror button and re-peatedly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

Operation

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operatingremote-controlled systems, such as the ga-rage door, using the integrated UniversalRemote Control. There is a risk of injury orrisk of damage to property. Make sure thatthe area of movement of the respective

system is clear during programming andoperation. Also follow the safety informa-tion of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interiormirror while the engine is running or whenthe ignition is started. To do this, hold downthe button within receiving range of thesystem until the function is activated. Theinterior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-less signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functionsPress and hold the two outer buttons on theinterior mirror simultaneously for approxi-mately 20 seconds until the LED on the in-terior mirror flashes rapidly. All stored func-tions will be deleted. The functions cannotbe deleted individually.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror displayThe point of the compass is displayed in themirror when driving straight.

Seite 220



Operating conceptVarious functions can be called up by press-ing the control button with a pointed object,such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similarobject. The following setting options aredisplayed in succession, depending on howlong the control button is pressed:

– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steeringsetting.

– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zonesSets the particular compass zones on the ve-hicle so that the compass operates correctly;refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of theset compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press thecontrol button quickly and repeatedlyuntil the number of the compass zonethat corresponds with your location ap-pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. Thecompass is ready for use again after approx-imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated inthe event of the following:

– The wrong compass point is displayed.

– The point of the compass displayed doesnot change despite changing the direc-tion of travel.

– Not all points of the compass are dis-played.

Seite 221



Procedure1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines nearthe vehicle and that there is sufficientroom to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compasszone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap-prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appearson the display. Next, drive in a completecircle at least once at a speed of no morethan 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-cessful, the "C" is replaced by the pointsof the compass.

Left/right-hand steeringThe digital compass is already set for rightor left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the languagePress and hold the control button for ap-prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press thecontrol button again to switch betweenEnglish "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap-proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shieldTo provide protection against glare, fold thesun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located in the sun visorbehind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light-ing switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontalcup holders, the cigarette lighter above it inthe center console.

AshtrayIn order to empty the ashtray, remove theashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

WARNING

Contact with the hot heating element orthe hot socket of the cigarette lighter cancause burns. Flammable materials can ig-nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or isheld against the respective objects. Thereis a risk of fire and injuries. Take hold ofthe cigarette lighter by its handle. Makesure that children do not use the cigarettelighter and burn themselves.

Seite 222



NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, theycan cause a short circuit. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Replace the cigarettelighter or socket cover again after usingthe socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can beremoved as soon as it popsback out.

Sockets

ConceptThe lighter socket can be used as a socketfor electrical equipment while the ignitionis switched on or the engine is running.

General informationThe total load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

Safety information

WARNING

Devices and cables in the unfolding area ofthe airbags, such as portable navigationdevices, can hinder the unfolding of theairbag or be thrown around in the car's in-terior during unfolding. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that devices and cablesare not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle batterycan work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-boardnetwork can be overloaded or damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Onlyconnect battery chargers for the vehiclebattery to the starting aid terminals in theengine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, theycan cause a short circuit. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Replace the cigarettelighter or socket cover again after usingthe socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 223



In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side inthe cargo area.

USB interface

ConceptMobile devices with USB port can be con-nected to the USB interface.

General informationFollow the information regarding the con-nection of mobile devices to the USB inter-face in the section on USB connections, re-fer to page 61.

In the front center console

The USB interface is located in the front ofthe center console.

In the rear center console

One USB dual charge socket is located inthe rear center console.

Under the center armrest

The USB interface is located under the cen-ter armrest.

Seite 224



Storage compartments



Safety information

WARNING

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's inte-rior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-jury. Secure loose objects or devices witha cable connection to the vehicle in thecar's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats candamage the dashboard. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Do not use anti-slippads.

Overview

The following storage compartments areavailable in the car's interior:

– Glove compartment on the front passen-ger side.

– Storage compartment under the driver'sseat.

– Compartments in the doors.

– Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.

– Storage compartment in front of the cupholders.

– Clothes hooks

– Storage compartments in the cargo area.

– Storage tray in the center console.

– Pockets on the backrests of the frontseats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

WARNING

Folded open, the glove compartment pro-trudes in the car's interior. Objects in theglove compartment can be thrown into thecar's interior while driving, for instance inthe event of an accident or during brakingand evasive maneuvers. There is a risk ofinjury. Always close the glove compart-ment immediately after using it.

Seite 225

Storage compartments CONTROLS


Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartmentswitches on.

ClosingFold up the cover.

Driver's seat

There is a storage compartment under thedriver's seat.

Compartments in the doors

General informationThere are storage compartments in thedoors.

Safety information

WARNING

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles orglasses, can break in the event of an acci-dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.Broken glass can be scattered in the car'sinterior. There is a risk of injury or risk ofdamage to property. Do not use any break-able objects while driving. Only stow

breakable objects in closed storage com-partments.

Center armrest

General informationThe center armrest contains a storage com-partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-rest upward, arrow 2.

Set the inclineThe center armrest can be adjusted in sev-eral tilt settings.

Cup holders

Safety information

NOTICE

Unsuitable containers in the cup holderand hot beverages can damage the cupholder and increase the risk of injury inthe event of an accident. There is a risk ofinjury or risk of damage to property. Uselight-weight, unbreakable, and sealablecontainers. Do not transport hot bever-

Seite 226

CONTROLS Storage compartments


ages. Do not force objects into the cupholder.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

General informationThe cup holder is located in the center arm-rest.

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one afterthe other.

Safety information

NOTICE

With an open cup holder, the center arm-rest cannot be folded back up. There is arisk of damage to property. Press back thecovers before the center armrest is foldedup.

Clothes hooks

General informationThe clothes hooks are located above therear doors.

Safety information

WARNING

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks canobstruct the view while driving. There is arisk of an accident. When suspendingclothing articles from the clothes hooks,ensure that they will not obstruct the driv-er's view.

WARNING

Improper use of the clothes hooks can leadto a risk of objects flying about duringbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is arisk of injury and risk of damage to prop-erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-stance clothing articles, from the clotheshooks.

Seite 227

Storage compartments CONTROLS


Cargo area



Loading

Safety information

WARNING

High gross weight can overheat the tires,damage them internally and cause a sud-den drop in tire inflation pressure. Drivingcharacteristics may be negatively im-pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-ing the braking distances and changingthe steering response. There is a risk of anaccident. Pay attention to the permittedload capacity of the tires and never exceedthe permitted gross weight.

WARNING

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's inte-rior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-jury. Secure loose objects or devices with

a cable connection to the vehicle in thecar's interior.

WARNING

Improperly stowed objects can shift andbe thrown into the car's interior, for in-stance in the event of an accident or dur-ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehi-cle occupants can be hit and injured. Thereis a risk of injury. Stow and secure objectsand cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.There is a risk of damage to property.Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargoarea.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” onyour vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca-pacity. For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there willbe five 150 lb passengers in your vehi-cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 228

CONTROLS Cargo area


luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-hicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load ca-pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces the availa-ble cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weightof the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants,the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo– Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-sible, directly behind and at the bottomof the rear passenger seat backrests.

– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat isnot occupied, secure each of the outersafety belts in the opposite buckle.

– If necessary, fold down the rear back-rests to stow large cargo.

– Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

– Small and light cargo: secure withratchet straps or draw straps.

– Larger and heavy cargo: secure withcargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

With storage compartment package: to se-cure the cargo there are four lashing eyes inthe cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashingstraps, retaining straps, draw straps orcargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargoarea.

Cargo cover

General informationWhen the tailgate is opened, the cargocover is raised.

Safety information

WARNING

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-nection to the vehicle, for instance mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's inte-rior while driving, for instance in theevent of an accident or during braking and

Seite 229

Cargo area CONTROLS


evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-jury. Secure loose objects or devices witha cable connection to the vehicle in thecar's interior.

RemovingFor storing bulky objects the cargo covercan be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retainingstraps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the bracketson the left and right.

Installing1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until itaudibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining strapsat the tailgate.

Storage compartments in thecargo area

Storage compartment on the sideA storage compartment is located on the leftside.

Multi-function hook

WARNING

Improper use of the multi-function hookscan lead to a risk of objects flying aboutduring braking and evasive maneuvers,for example. There is a risk of injury andrisk of damage to property. Only hanglightweight objects, such as shoppingbags, from the multi-function hooks. Onlytransport heavy luggage in the cargo areaif it has been appropriately secured.

The cargo area contains two multi-functionhooks.

Enlarging the cargo area

ConceptDepending on the vehicle equipment, thecargo area can be enlarged as follows:

– The rear seat backrests can be foldeddown.

– The rear seat backrests can be movedinto an upright loading position usingthe cargo setting.

General informationThe rear seat backrest is divided at a ratioof 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrestsand the center section can be folded downseparately.

Seite 230

CONTROLS Cargo area


The rear seat backrests can be folded downfrom the rear.

Safety information

WARNING

Danger of jamming with folding down thebackrests. There is a risk of injury or riskof damage to property. Make sure that thearea of movement of the rear backrest andthe of the head restraint is clear prior tofolding down.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-cured cargo can be thrown into the car'sinterior; for instance, in the event of an ac-cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.There is a risk of injury. Make sure thatthe rear seat backrest is locked after fold-ing it back.

WARNING

Unexpected movements of the rear seatbackrest while driving may occur due tounintentional unlocking of the rear seatbackrests by the straps. There is a risk ofinjury. Do not fasten any objects to thestraps for unlocking the rear backrests.

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint systemis limited or compromised with incorrectseat adjustment or improper installation ofthe child seat. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the child re-straint system fits securely against thebackrest. If possible, adjust the backresttilt for all affected backrests and correctlyadjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.If possible, adjust the height of the headrestraints or remove them.

WARNING


Folding down the rear seatbackrest from the rear

Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest foldsforward.

Cargo position

ConceptThe rear seat backrests can be moved intoan upright loading position individually. Anadjustment in several tilt stages is possibleas needed.

Seite 231

Cargo area CONTROLS


Settings1. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seatbackrest as required.

3. Engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding back the backrestWithout a cargo position:

1. Pull the strap.

2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-right seating position and engage it.

With a cargo position:

1. Pull the strap.

2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.The rear seat backrest first engages inthe loading position.

3. Pull the strap again.

4. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-right seating position and engage it.

Variable cargo area floor

ConceptWith the variable cargo area floor, the cargoarea can be configured corresponding totransport requirements.

General informationFollow instructions on securing cargo, referto page 228.

Seite 232

CONTROLS Cargo area


Removing the cargo floor panel1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer

to page 230.

2. Fold the rear part of the cargo floorpanel upward.

3. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rearand fold up above the locking point ofthe upper position, refer to page 233.

4. Pull the cargo floor panel backward fromthe brackets.

Inserting the cargo floor panel1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-

ports at a shallow angle. The cargo areafloor must engage noticeably.

2. Fold the cargo area floor over down-ward.

Folded up position

Safety information

WARNING

Improper use of the variable cargo floorpanel can lead to a danger of objects flyingabout during braking and evasive maneu-vers. There is a risk of injury and risk ofdamage to property.

– Do not use the variable cargo floorpanel to separate the cargo area andcar's interior in the sense of a parti-tion net.

– Only use the variable cargo floorpanel in the folded-up position whenthe backrests are folded up andlocked.

– Fold down the variable cargo floorpanel before driving off.

– Always secure cargo against shifting,using straps, belts and lashing eyes,for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panelFold the rear part of the cargo floor panelupward.

Fold up the cargo floor panel. You'vereached the maximum cargo height.

Seite 233

Cargo area CONTROLS


MINI Picnic Bench

ConceptThe MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort-able seating surface on the loading lip of thevehicle.

General informationOnly use the MINI Picnic Bench while thevehicle is parked and with the tailgate open.When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use,fold it together to prevent soiling and dam-age.

In vehicles with a no-touch opening andclosing tailgate:

If the remote control is in the sensor area,the tailgate can be opened or closed inad-vertently by an unconscious or alleged rec-ognized foot movement.

The sensor has an approximate range of5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of thevehicle.

Safety information

WARNING


OverviewThe MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un-derside of the cargo area floor.

Mounting1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor

panel upward.

2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on thefront part of the cargo floor panel and at-tach it to the rear part of the cargo floorpanel using the four snaps.

3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to-ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench isfastened with magnets.

4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floordownward.

To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro-ceed in reverse order.

Seite 234

CONTROLS Cargo area


Folding down1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid-dle and pull it back and up against theforce of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floordownward and place the MINI PicnicBench over the loading lip of the cargoarea. Place a protective cloth over thebumper.

Folding upFold rear part of the cargo floor panel up-ward.

The MINI Picnic Bench swings against theunderside of the cargo area floor and is fas-tened there with magnets.

Seite 235

Cargo area CONTROLS


236


DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving .................................................. 238Saving fuel ............................................................................................... 243


Things to remember when driving



Breaking-in period

General informationMoving parts need to begin working to-gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you toachieve a long vehicle life and good effi-ciency.

During break-in, do not use the LaunchControl, refer to page 135.

Safety information

WARNING

Due to new parts and components, safetyand driver assistance systems can reactwith a delay. There is a risk of an accident.After installing new parts or with a newvehicle, drive conservatively and inter-vene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts andcomponents.

Engine, transmission, and axledrive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine androad speed:

– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can graduallybe increased.

TiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufac-turing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction poten-tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrake discs and brake pads only reach theirfull effectiveness after ap-prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderatelyduring this break-in period.

ClutchThe function of the clutch reaches its opti-mal level only after a distance driven of ap-prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacementThe same break-in procedures should be ob-served if any of the components above-men-

Seite 238

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving


tioned have to be renewed in the course ofthe vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

WARNING

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-cle and can endanger occupants and othertraffic participants or damage the vehiclein the event of an accident, braking or eva-sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaustfumes may enter the car's interior. Thereis a risk of injury or risk of damage toproperty. Do not drive with the tailgateopen.

Driving with the tailgate openIf driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:

– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

– Greatly increase the air flow from thevents.

– Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

WARNING

During driving operation, high tempera-tures can occur underneath the vehiclebody, for instance caused by the exhaustgas system. If combustible materials, suchas leaves or grass, come in contact withhot parts of the exhaust gas system, thesematerials can ignite. There is a risk of in-jury or risk of damage to property. Do notremove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make

sure that no combustible materials cancome in contact with hot vehicle parts indriving operation, idle or during parking.Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.

Mobile communication devices inthe vehicle

WARNING

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones caninfluence one another. There is radiationdue to the transmission operations of mo-bile phones. There is a risk of injury orrisk of damage to property. If possible, inthe car's interior use only mobile phoneswith direct connections to an exterior an-tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-ence and deflect the radiation from thecar's interior.

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of watercan form between the tires and road sur-face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-planing. It is characterized by a partial orcomplete loss of contact between the tiresand the road surface, ultimately undermin-ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-cle.

Driving through water

General informationWhen driving through water, follow the fol-lowing:

– Drive through calm water only.

– Drive through water only if it is notdeeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

– Drive through water no faster thanwalking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Seite 239

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS


Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through toodeep water, water can enter into the en-gine compartment, the electrical system orthe transmission. There is a risk of damageto property. When driving through water,do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-ter level and the maximum speed for driv-ing through water.

Braking safely

General informationThe vehicle is equipped with ABS as astandard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situationsthat require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can stillavoid any obstacles with a minimum ofsteering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and soundsfrom the hydraulic circuits indicate thatABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limitthe pedal distance or block a depressedpedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stowobjects in the vehicle such that they aresecured and cannot enter into the driver'sfloor area. Use floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle and can be safely attachedto the floor. Do not use loose floor matsand do not layer several floor mats. Makesure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely fastened again after they were re-moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet, salted, or in heavyrain, gently press the brake pedal every fewmiles.

Ensure that this action does not endangerother traffic.

The heat generated during braking driesbrake discs and brake pads and protectsthem against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail-able when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients inthe gear that requires least braking effort.Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effectby shifting down, going all the way to firstgear, if needed.

Safety information

WARNING

Light but consistent brake pressure canlead to high temperatures, brakes wearingout and possibly even brake failure. Thereis a risk of an accident. Avoid placing ex-cessive stress on the brake system.

WARNING

In idle state or with the engine switchedoff, safety-relevant functions, for instanceengine braking effect, braking force boostand steering assistance, are restricted ornot available at all. There is a risk of an ac-

Seite 240



cident. Do not drive in idle state or withthe engine switched off.

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contami-nation on the brake pads are increased bythe following circumstances:

– Low mileage.

– Extended periods when the vehicle isnot used at all.

– Infrequent use of the brakes.

– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaningagents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs willcause a pulsating effect on the brakes intheir response - generally this cannot becorrected.

Condensation water under theparked vehicleWhen using the automatic climate control,condensation water develops and collectsunderneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If ground clearance is insufficient, theremight be contact with the front or rearspoiler, for instance when driving overcurbs or entering into underground vehi-cle parking garages. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Ensure that there is suffi-cient ground clearance available.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General informationInstallation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso-ries.

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of theroof rack.

LoadingBecause roof-mounted luggage racks raisethe vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,they have a major effect on vehicle handlingand steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:

– Do not exceed the approved roof/axleloads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-tained for tilting and opening the glasssunroof.

– Distribute the roof load uniformly.

– The roof load should not extend past theloading area.

– Always place the heaviest pieces on thebottom.

– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-stance using ratchet straps.

– Do not let objects project into the open-ing path of the tailgate.

– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-celeration and braking maneuvers. Takecorners gently.

Driving on poor roads

ConceptBecause of its greater ground clearance, thevehicle can be driven on a variety of roadtypes and qualities.

All-wheel drive can help improve forwardmomentum.

Seite 241

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS


Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in unpaved areas, for instancestones or branches, can damage the vehi-cle. There is a risk of damage to property.Do not drive on unpaved terrain.

When driving on poor roadsFor your own safety, for the safety of pas-sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow-ing points:

– Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be-fore driving.

– Do not take risks when driving.

– Adjust the speed to the road surfaceconditions. The steeper and more un-even the road surface, the slower thespeed.

– When driving on steep uphill or down-hill grades: add engine oil and coolantup to near the MAX mark.

– Avoid that the chassis bottom coming incontact with the ground. The groundclearance may vary depending on thevehicle load.

– When wheels continue to spin, depressthe accelerator so that driving stabilitycontrol systems can distribute the driv-ing force to the wheels. Activate DTCDynamic Traction Control if available.

After a trip on poor roadsNote the following to maintain drivingsafety:

– Clear heavy soiling from the body.

– Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam-age.

Driving on racetracks

Higher mechanical and thermal loads duringracetrack operation lead to increased wear.This wear is not covered by the warranty.The vehicle is not designed for use in motorsports competition.

Seite 242



Saving fuel



General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologiesfor the reduction of fuel consumption andemission values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number ofdifferent factors.

The implementation of certain measures,driving style and regular maintenance caninfluence fuel consumption and environ-mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump-tion.

Remove attached parts follow-ing use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted orrear luggage racks which are no longer re-quired following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair theaerodynamics and increase the fuel con-sumption.

Close the windows and glasssunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andraises fuel consumption.

Tires

General informationTires can affect fuel consumption in variousways, for instance tire size may influencefuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if needed, correct the tire infla-tion pressure at least twice a month and be-fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rollingresistance and thus raises fuel consumptionand tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-upwhile the vehicle remains stationary. Startdriving right away, but at moderate enginespeeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engineto reach its operating temperature.

Seite 243

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS


Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reducesfuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to thevehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuelconsumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shiftindicator, refer to page 145.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take yourfoot off the accelerator and let the vehiclecoast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the ac-celerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast-ing.

Switch off the engine duringlonger stops

Switching off the engineSwitch off the engine during longer stops,for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-ings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicleautomatically switches off the engine dur-ing a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-started rather than leaving the engine run-ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-sions are reduced. Savings can begin withina few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-mined by other factors, such as drivingstyle, road conditions, maintenance or envi-ronmental factors.

Switch off any functions thatare not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energyand consume additional fuel, especially incity and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are notneeded.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly toachieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-nance work be performed by a MINI servicecenter.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems,refer to page 285.

GREEN Mode

ConceptGREEN Mode supports a driving style thatsaves on fuel consumption. For this pur-pose, the engine control and comfort fea-tures, for instance the climate control out-put, are adjusted.

For Steptronic transmission:

Seite 244

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel


Under certain conditions the engine is auto-matically decoupled from the transmissionin the D selector lever position. The vehiclecontinues traveling with the engine idlingto reduce fuel consumption. The D selectorlever position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructionsare displayed to assist with an optimizedfuel consumption driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed inthe instrument cluster as bonus range.

General informationThe system includes the following MINI-MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis-plays:

– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 246.

– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer topage 246.

– GREEN climate control, refer topage 245.

– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer topage 248.

– Coasting driving condition, refer topage 247.

Activating GREEN ModePress the MINI Driving Modesswitch downward untilGREEN is displayed in the in-strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch1. Activating GREEN Mode.



Via the Central Information Display(CID)1. "My MINI"




Activating/deactivating the functionsThe following functions can be activated/deactivated:

– "GREEN speed warning":

– "GREEN climate control"


GREEN Limit– Activate the GREEN Limit:

"GREEN speed warning":

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed ofthe set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

– Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:

"Tip at:"

Select the desired speed.

GREEN climate controlClimate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem-perature, or adjusting the rate of heating orcooling of the car's interior consumptioncan be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex-terior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savingsShows potential savings with the currentsettings in percentages.

Seite 245




GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helpsyou extend your driving range.

This may be displayed as thebonus range in the instrumentcluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range dis-play.

The bonus range is automatically reset ev-ery time the vehicle is refueled.

– Green display: efficient driving style.

– Gray display: modify driving style, forinstance by backing off the acceleratorpedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instru-ment cluster indicates yourcurrent driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1:display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: displaywhen accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style isshown by the position of the mark:

– Mark inside the green range: efficientdriving style.

– Mark outside the green range: modifydriving style, for example by backing offthe accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

The GREEN tip indicates that your drivingstyle can be modified to be more efficient,for example by backing off the accelerator.

Activating/deactivating the displayActivate information relating to the drivingstyle and GREEN tips in the instrumentcluster using the Central Information Dis-play (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "Displays"


5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbolsAn additional symbol and text instructionsare displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style,look well ahead when driving,accelerate conservatively, anddelay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selectedGREEN speed.


Switch from M/S to D and avoidmanual shift interventions.

Seite 246



Symbol Measure


Follow the shift instructions.


Engage neutral for an enginestop.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying MINIMALISM informationThe current efficiency of the functions inGREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con-trol Display.


1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM"

Information is shown on the following func-tions:

– Auto Start/Stop function.

– Energy recovery.

– Climate control output.

– Coasting.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Further information on the MINIMALISManalyzer, refer to page 248.

Open GREEN Tip displayVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "GREEN tips"

Coasting

ConceptThe function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the en-gine is automatically decoupled from thetransmission when selector lever position Dis set. The vehicle continues traveling withthe engine idling to reduce fuel consump-tion. Selector lever position D remains en-gaged.

This driving condition is referred to ascoasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-pled again.

General informationCoasting is a component of the GREEN driv-ing mode.

Coasting is automatically activated whenthe GREEN driving mode is called via theMINI Driving Modes switch, refer topage 186.

A proactive driving style helps the driver touse the function often and supports thefuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Functional requirementsThe function is available in the speed rangefrom approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to100 mph/160 km/h.

– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal arenot operated.

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-sition D.

– Engine and transmission are at operat-ing temperature.

– With a camera in the area of the interiormirror: the system does not detect anyvehicles ahead of you.

Seite 247



Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, thecoasting mode can be influenced with theshift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shiftpaddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling theright shift paddle.

2. To activate coasting mode, actuate theright shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Display


The bar display below thetachometer is filled in greenand the mark appears at thezero point. The tachometershows the idle speed.

Indications on the Control Display

The coasting driving condition is displayedin the MINIMALISM Info while driving.

The distance traveled in the coasting driv-ing condition is indicated by a counter.

Displaying MINIMALISM information


1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM"

System limitsThe function is not available if one of thefollowing conditions applies:

– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.

– Cruise control is activated.

– If driving in the dynamic limit range.

– If driving on steep uphill or downhillgrades.

– The battery charge state is temporarilytoo low.

– The vehicle electrical system is drawingexcessive current.

MINIMALISM analyzer

ConceptThe function helps develop an especially ef-ficient driving style and to conserve fuel.

For this purpose, the driving style is ana-lyzed. The assessment is done in variouscategories and is displayed on the ControlDisplay.

This display will help you adjust your driv-ing style and save some fuel.

The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.

The range of the vehicle can be extended byadopting an efficient driving style. This gainin range is displayed as a bonus range in theinstrument cluster and on the Control Dis-play.

Functional requirementThis function is available in GREEN Mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzerVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"


3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control DisplayThe display of the MINIMALISM analyzerconsists of a fish in a water glass, a table ofvalues and the display of the achieved bo-nus range.

Seite 248



The fish and the movements of the water inthe bowl symbolize the efficiency of thedriving style.

The more efficient the driving style, the lessthe water sloshes around in the bowl andthe better is the fish's mood. If the drivingstyle is inefficient, the water oscillates, thefish's mood worsens, and a reduced numberof stars is displayed.

The table of values contains stars and evalu-ates the driving style in different catego-ries. The more efficient the driving style,the more stars are displayed in the table.

The bonus range achieved by a driving stylethat minimizes fuel consumption is dis-played below the table of values. The moreefficient the driving style, the faster the bo-nus range increases.

To assist with an efficient driving style,GREEN tips are displayed while driving.

Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-ing fuel, refer to page 243.

Seite 249



250


MOBILITY

Refueling .................................................................................................. 252Fuel ............................................................................................................ 254Wheels and tires .................................................................................... 256Engine compartment ............................................................................ 276Engine oil ................................................................................................. 279Coolant ...................................................................................................... 283Maintenance ........................................................................................... 285Replacing components ......................................................................... 287Breakdown assistance .......................................................................... 298Care ............................................................................................................ 306


Refueling



General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer topage 254, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than30 miles/50 km the engine may no longerhave sufficient fuel. Engine functions arenot ensured anymore. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel

filler flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-tached to the fuel filler flap.

Seite 252

MOBILITY Refueling


Closing

WARNING

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can bejammed and crushed during closing. Thecap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuelvapors can escape. There is a risk of injuryor risk of damage to property. Pay atten-tion that the retaining strap is not jammedor crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise untilyou clearly hear a click.

2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapE.g., in the event of an electrical malfunc-tion.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-fueling

General informationWhen refueling, insert the filler nozzlecompletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up thefuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

– Premature switching off.

– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzleclicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-erly after refueling, otherwise the emissionswarning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gasstation.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfillingof the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged bycontact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harmthe environment. There is a risk of damageto property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 253

Refueling MOBILITY


Fuel



Fuel recommendation

General informationDepending on the region, many gas stationssell fuel that has been customized to winteror summer conditions. Fuel that is availablein winter, for instance helps make a coldstart easier.

Gasoline

General informationFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfurcontent.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump ascontaining metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-eling.

Ethanol should meet the following qualitystandards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard ineach case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel orwrong fuel additives can damage the fuelsystem and engine. Furthermore, the cata-lytic converter is permanently damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot refuel or add the following in the caseof gasoline engines:

– Leaded gasoline.

– Metallic additives, for instance man-ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button afterrefueling with the wrong fuel. Contact adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel systemand the engine. There is a risk of damageto property. Do not use fuels with a higherpercentage of ethanol than recommended.Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-nol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini-mum quality can compromise engine func-tion or cause engine damage. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not fill withfuel that does not comply with the mini-mum quality.

Seite 254

MOBILITY Fuel


CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result inharmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-tionally, problems relating to drivability,starting and stalling, especially under cer-tain environmental conditions such ashigh ambient temperature and high alti-tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered,we recommend switching to a high qualitygasoline brand and a higher octane grade— AKI number — for a few tank fills. Toavoid harmful engine deposits, it is highlyrecommended to purchase gasoline fromTop Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda-tions may result in the need for unsched-uled maintenance.

Recommended fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve therated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel gradeMINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works:

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKIRating, the engine may produce knockingsounds when starting at high external tem-peratures. This has no effect on the enginelife.

Seite 255

Fuel MOBILITY


Wheels and tires



Tire inflation pressure

General informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflationpressure influence the following:

– The service life of the tires.

– Road safety.

– Driving comfort.

– Fuel consumption.

Safety information

WARNING

A tire with too little or no tire inflationpressure may heat up significantly andsustain damage. This will have a negativeimpact on aspects of handling, such assteering and braking response. There is arisk of an accident. Regularly check thetire inflation pressure, and correct it asneeded, for instance twice a month and be-fore a long trip.

Tire inflation pressurespecifications

In the tire inflation pressure tableThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 257, contains all tire inflation pres-sure specifications for the specified tiresizes at the ambient temperature. The tireinflation pressure values apply to tire sizesapproved by the manufacturer of the vehiclefor the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres-sure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.

– Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General informationTires heat up while driving. The tire infla-tion pressure increases with the tire tem-perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tireinflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressurespecifications in the tire inflationpressure tableThe tire inflation pressure specifications inthe tire inflation pressure table only relateto cold tires or tires at the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levelswhen the tires are cold, i.e.:

– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 kmhas not been exceeded.

Seite 256

MOBILITY Wheels and tires


– If the vehicle has not moved again for atleast 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine, refer to page 256, the in-tended tire inflation pressure levels forthe mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in allfour tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if thecurrent tire inflation pressure value de-viates from the specified value.

4. Check whether all valve caps arescrewed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflationpressureFor run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: resetthe Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure ofthe emergency wheelAlso check the tire inflation pressure of theemergency wheel in the cargo area regu-larly, and correct it as needed.

Tire inflation pressures up to100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h andfor optimum driving comfort, note the pres-sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-ble, refer to page 257, and adjust as neces-sary.

These pressure values can also be found onthe tire inflation pressure label on the driv-er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specificationsin bar/PSI withcold tires

225/55 R 17 97W Std/RSC

225/55 R 17 97H M+S A/S Std

225/55 R 17 97H M+S Std/RSC

225/50 R 18 95W RSC

225/50 R 18 95H M+S RSC

225/50 R 18 95V M+S A/SStd/RSC

225/50 R 18 99W XL Std

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Seite 257

Wheels and tires MOBILITY



205/60 R 17 93H M+S Std

225/45 R 19 92W RSC

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

Emergencywheel

T 115/95 R 1795 M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4


Specificationsin bar/PSIwith cold tires

225/55 R 1797 H M+SStd/RSC

225/50 R 1895 W RSC

225/50 R 1895 H M+S RSC

225/50 R 1895 V M+S A/SStd/RSC

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

205/60 R 1793 H M+S Std

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 1992 W RSC

2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36

Emergencywheel

T 115/95 R 1795 M


4.2 / 60

JOHN COOPER WORKS



205/60 R 1793 H M+S Std


225/50 R 1895 W RSC

225/50 R 1895 H M+S RSC

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/45 R 1992 W RSC

2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max.speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

WARNING

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on thefollowing pages. Otherwise, tire damageand accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table,refer to page 259, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 258



Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4



225/50 R 1895 W RSC

225/50 R 1895 H M+S RSC


225/50 R 1899 W XL Std

2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

225/55 R 1797 W Std/RSC

225/55 R 1797 H M+S A/SStd

225/55 R 1797 H M+SStd/RSC

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

205/60 R 1793 H M+S Std

225/45 R 1992 W RSC

2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

Emergencywheel

T 115/95 R 1795 M


4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4


Specificationsin bar/PSIwith cold tires

205/60 R 1793 H M+S Std

225/50 R 1895 W RSC

225/50 R 1895 H M+S RSC


2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

225/55 R 1797 H M+SStd/RSC

2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36

225/45 R 1992 W RSC

3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

Emergencywheel

T 115/95 R 1795 M


4.2 / 60

Seite 259



JOHN COOPER WORKS



205/60 R 1793 H M+S Std


225/50 R 1895 W RSC

225/50 R 1895 H M+S RSC

2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

225/45 R 1992 W RSC

3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

Tire identification marks

Tire size205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire loadMaximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tiresidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating– GAWR – on the certification label on thedriver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the

vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tireloads, respectively.

Speed letterQ = up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R = 106 mph/170 km/h

S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2118

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

2118: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelinesof the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

RecommendationRegardless of the tire tread, replace tires atleast every 6 years.

Manufacture dateYou can find the manufacture date of thetire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT … 2118 21st week 2018

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applica-ble on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width.

Seite 260



E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-ture A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform toFederal Safety Requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. E.g., atire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends upon the ac-tual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm dueto variations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor traction per-formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest,B, and C, representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perform-ance which all passenger vehicle tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band Arepresent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-derinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 264, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the let-ters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread of less than0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-creased risk of hydroplaning.

Seite 261



Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread of less than0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitablefor winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around thetire's circumference and have the legally re-quired minimum height of 0.063 in-ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators aremarked on the tire sidewall with TWI, TreadWear Indicator.

Tire damage

General informationInspect your tires regularly for damage, for-eign objects lodged in the tread, and treadwear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-cles can cause serious damage to wheels,tires and suspension parts. This is morelikely to occur with low-profile tires, whichprovide less cushioning between the wheeland the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-ards and reduce your speed, especially ifyour vehicle is equipped with low-profiletires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehiclemalfunctions:

– Unusual vibrations.

– Unusual tire or running noises.

– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit-uations, for instance:

– Driving over curbs.

– Road damage.

– Tire inflation pressure too low.

– Vehicle overloading.

– Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

WARNING

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-trol. There is a risk of an accident. If tiredamage is suspected while driving, imme-diately reduce speed and stop. Havewheels and tires checked. For this pur-pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop. Have vehicle towedor transported as needed. Do not repairdamaged tires, but have them replaced.

WARNING

Tires can become damaged by driving overobstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, athigh speed. Larger wheels have a smallertire cross-section. The smaller the tirecross-section, the higher the risk of tiredamage. There is a danger of accidents andproperty damage. If possible, drive aroundobstacles, or drive over them slowly andcarefully.

Seite 262



Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancingHave mounting and wheel balancing carriedout by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General informationYou can ask the dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop about the correct wheel/tire combina-tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

WARNING

Wheels and tires which are not suitablefor your vehicle can damage parts of thevehicle, for instance due to contact withthe body due to tolerances despite thesame official size rating. There is a risk ofan accident. The manufacturer of your ve-hicle strongly suggests that you usewheels and tires that have been recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer foryour vehicle type.

WARNING

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations willhave a negative impact on the vehicle'shandling and on the function of a varietyof systems, such as the Anti-lock BrakeSystem or Dynamic Stability Control.There is a risk of an accident. To maintaingood handling and vehicle response, useonly tires with a single tread configurationfrom a single manufacturer. The manufac-turer of the vehicle recommends that youuse wheels and tires that have been rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer

for your vehicle type. Following tire dam-age, have the original wheel/tire combina-tion remounted on the vehicle as soon aspossible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of thevehicle recommends certain tire brands.The tire brands can be identified by a staron the tire sidewall.

New tiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufac-turing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction poten-tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

WARNING

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-ing structures. With advanced age theservice life can be limited. There is a riskof an accident. The manufacturer of yourvehicle does not recommend the use of re-treaded tires.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does notrecommend the use of retreaded tires.

Seite 263



Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operat-ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-vide better winter traction than summertires, they usually do not provide the samelevel of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle ishigher than the permissible speed for thewinter tires, then attach a label showing thepermissible maximum speed in the field ofview. The label is available from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and donot exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tiresFor your own safety, use only runflat tires.No spare tire is available in the case of a flattire. Further information is available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on thefront and rear axles depending on individualdriving conditions. The tires can be rotatedin pairs between the axles to achieve evenwear. Further information is available froma dealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop. After ro-tating, check the tire pressure and correct,if needed.

Storing tires

Air pressureDo not exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure indicated on the side wall of thetire.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry anddark place.

Always protect tires against all contact withoil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

ConceptRun-flat tires permit continued driving un-der restricted conditions even in the eventof a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General informationThe wheels are composed of tires that areself-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tireto remain drivable to a restricted degree inthe event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv-ing with a flat tire.

Safety information

WARNING


Seite 264



Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewallwith RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling awayby setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the frontwheels are in the straight-ahead posi-tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleat an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

ConceptWith the Mobility System, minor tire dam-age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant ispumped into the tires, which seals the dam-age from the inside.

General information– Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres-sor and sealant container.

– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-fective if the tire puncture measures ap-prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

– Contact a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

– If possible, do not remove foreign bodiesthat have penetrated the tire. Only re-move foreign objects if they are visiblyprotruding from the tire.

– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-ant container and apply it to the steer-ing wheel.

– The use of a sealant can damage theTPM wheel electronics. In this case,have the TPM wheel electronics re-placed at the next opportunity.

– The compressor can be used to checkthe tire inflation pressure.

Overview

StorageThe Mobility System is located in a bag onthe right side trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

– Sealant container, arrow 1.

– Filling hose, arrow 2.

Seite 265



Observe use-by date on the sealant con-tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.


– Secure the vehicle against rolling awayby setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the frontwheels are in the straight-ahead posi-tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleat an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gasescan enter into the vehicle. The exhaustgases contain pollutants which are color-less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keepthe exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficientventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex-tended operation. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Do not run the compres-sor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling1. Shake the sealant container.

Seite 266



2. Pull filling hose completely out of thecover of the sealant container. Do notkink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into theholder on the compressor housing, en-suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-tainer onto the tire valve of the non-working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in-sert the plug into the power socket in-side the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutesto fill the tire with sealant and achieve atire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant,the tire inflation pressure may sporadicallyreach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off thecompressor at this point.

Checking and adjusting the tireinflation pressure

Checking1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on thetire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Seite 267



Removing and stowing the sealantcontainer1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from thecompressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container insuitable material to avoid dirtying thecargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is notreached1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket inside the vehicle.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back todistribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com-pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the powersocket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least2 bar cannot be reached, contact yourdealer’s service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of thecompressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the powersocket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure isreached1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.



4. Immediately drive approx.5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealantis evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds lessthan 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com-pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Seite 268



3. Insert the connector into the powersocket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to atleast 2.0 bar.

– Increase tire inflation pressure: withthe ignition switched on or the en-gine running, switch on the com-pressor.

– Reduce tire inflation pressure: pressthe button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of thecompressor from the tire valve.



Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer topage 172.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer topage 167.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealantcontainer of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

Safety information

WARNING

With the mounting of snow chains on un-suitable tires, the snow chains can comeinto contact with vehicle parts. There is arisk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-erty. Only mount snow chains on tires thatare designated by their manufacturer assuitable for the use of snow chains.

WARNING

Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam-age tires and vehicle components. There isa risk of accidents or risk of damage toproperty. Make sure that the snow chainsare always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten asneeded according to the snow chain manu-facturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chainsThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends use of fine-link snow chains. Certaintypes of fine-link snow chains have beentested by the manufacturer of the vehicleand recommended as road-safe and suitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chainsis available from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

UseUse only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-ped with the tires of the following size:

– 205/65 R 16.

– 205/60 R 17.

John Cooper Works:

205/60 R 17

Seite 269



Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in-structions.

Do not initialize the run-flat tires aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may re-sult in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPMafter mounting snow chains, as doing somay result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly ac-tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, ifneeded.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General informationWhen using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, awheel does not always need to be changedimmediately when there is a loss of tire in-flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels areavailable as accessories from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheelchanges. Even if all safety measures areobserved, there is a risk of the raised vehi-cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under thevehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under thevehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-hicle jack to bear weight. They have thepotential to exert too much strain on thevehicle jack, causing it to tip over and thevehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries ordanger to life. Do not place supports underthe vehicle jack.

WARNING

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-turer, is provided in order to perform awheel change in the event of a breakdown.The jack is not designed for frequent use;for example, changing from summer towinter tires. Using the jack frequently maycause it to become jammed or damaged.There is a risk of injury and risk of damageto property. Only use the jack to attach anemergency or spare wheel in the event ofa breakdown.

WARNING

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jackcan slip away. There is a risk of injury. Ifpossible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,and slip-resistant surface.

WARNING

The vehicle jack is optimized for liftingthe vehicle and for the jacking points onthe vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo usingthe vehicle jack.

Seite 270



WARNING

If the vehicle jack is not inserted into thejacking point provided for this purpose,the vehicle may be damaged or the vehiclejack may slip when it is being cranked up.There is a risk of injury or risk of damageto property. When cranking up the vehiclejack, ensure that it is inserted in the jack-ing point next to the wheel housing.

WARNING

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jackmay fall off of the jack if lateral forces areexerted on it. There is a risk of injury andrisk of damage to property. While the ve-hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forceson the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-er’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General informationThe vehicle manufacturer recommends toadditionally secure the vehicle against roll-ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objectsin front and behind the wheel that is diago-nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slightdownhill grade, place chocks and other suit-able objects, for instance a rock, under thewheels of both the front and rear axlesagainst the rolling direction.

Lug bolt lock

ConceptThe wheel lug bolts have a special coding.The lug bolts can only be released with theadapter which matches the coding.

OverviewThe adapter of the lug bolt lock is located inthe onboard vehicle tool kit, refer topage 287.

Seite 271



– Lug bolt, arrow 1.

– Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewingthe lug bolt.

Screwing on1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If

necessary, turn the adapter until it fitson the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tighteningtorque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it afterscrewing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.



– Engage a gear or move the selector leverto position P.

– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,have all vehicle occupants get out of thevehicle and ensure that they remain out-side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

– Depending on the vehicle equipment,get wheel change tools and, if necessary,the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangleor portable hazard warning light at anappropriate distance.

– Secure the vehicle additionally againstrolling.

– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack arelocated at the marked positions.

Seite 272



Jacking up the vehicle

WARNING

Hands and fingers can be jammed whenusing the vehicle jack. There is a risk ofinjury. Comply with the described handposition and do not change this positionwhile using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crankor lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-gular recess of the jacking point closestto the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning thevehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehiclejack as soon as the vehicle jack is underload and continue turning the vehiclejack crank or lever with one hand.

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack footstands vertically and at a right angle be-neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack footstands vertically and perpendicularly be-neath the jacking point after extendingthe vehicle jack.

7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the en-tire surface of the jack is in contact withthe ground and the wheel in question is

Seite 273



raised a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm offthe ground.

Mounting a wheelMount one emergency wheel only, as re-quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheelon and screw in at least two lug bolts ina crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of thevehicle manufacturer are mounted, theaccompanying lug bolts may have to beused as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug boltsand tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-clockwise to retract the vehicle jack andlower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-curely.

After the wheel change1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargoarea, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be storedunder the cargo floor panel because ofits size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the nextopportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts aretight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at thenearest dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repairshop.

Emergency wheel

ConceptIn the event of a flat tire, the emergencywheel can be used in place of the wheelwith the defective tire. The emergencywheel is only intended for temporary useuntil the defective tire/wheel has been re-placed.

General informationMount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of theemergency wheel in the cargo area regu-larly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

WARNING

The emergency wheel has particular di-mensions. When driving with an emer-gency wheel, changed driving propertiesmay occur, for instance reduced lane sta-bility when braking, longer braking dis-tance, and changed self-steering proper-ties in the limit area. There is a risk of anaccident. Drive moderately and do not ex-ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 274



Overview

The emergency wheel and the wheel changetools are located in the cargo area under thecargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor

panel.

2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.

3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.

4. Where applicable, remove the holderand the trailer hitch.

5. Remove the jacking point and the toolholder on the left next to the emergencywheel.

6. Slide the emergency wheel to the leftand remove it.

Inserting the emergency wheel1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left

and slide it to the right.

2. Where applicable, mount the holder andthe trailer hitch.

3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.

4. Screw on and tighten the butterflyscrew.

5. Insert and secure the jacking point andthe tool holder on the left next to theemergency wheel.

6. Insert the cargo floor panel.

Seite 275



Engine compartment




Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Seite 276

MOBILITY Engine compartment


Hood

Safety information

WARNING

Improperly executed work in the enginecompartment can damage vehicle compo-nents and impair vehicle functions. Thereis a risk of personal and property damage.The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that, in the effort to avoid suchrisks, work in the engine compartment beperformed by a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

WARNING

The engine compartment accommodatesmoving components. Certain componentsin the engine compartment can also movewith the vehicle switched off, for instancethe radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.Do not reach into the area of moving parts.Keep articles of clothing and hair awayfrom moving parts.

WARNING

There are protruding parts, for instancelocking hook, on the inside of the hood.There is a risk of injury. If the hood isopen, pay attention to protruding partsand keep clear of these areas.

WARNING

An incorrectly locked hood can open whiledriving and restrict visibility. There is arisk of an accident. Stop immediately andcorrectly close the hood.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when openingand closing the hood. There is a risk of in-jury. Make sure that the area of movementof the hood is clear during opening andclosing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed whenthe hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before openingthe hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engageon both sides. Pressing again can damagethe hood. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Open the hood again and thenclose it energetically. Avoid pressingagain.

Opening the hood1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the leveragain, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 277

Engine compartment MOBILITY


Indicator/warning lightsWhen the hood is opened, a Check Controlmessage is displayed.

Closing the hood

Let the hood fall from approx. 16 in-ches/40 cm, arrow.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 278

MOBILITY Engine compartment


Engine oil



General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent onyour driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oillevel after refueling by taking a detailedmeasurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase inthe following situations, for example:

– Sporty driving style.

– Break-in of the engine.

– Idling of the engine.

– With use of engine oil types that areclassified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear,depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causesengine damage. There is a risk of damageto property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-gine or the catalytic converter. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not add toomuch engine oil. When too much engineoil is added, have the engine oil level cor-rected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Electronic oil measurement

General informationThe electronic oil measurement has twomeasuring principles:

– Monitoring.

– Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance tripsor using a dynamic driving style, for in-stance when taking curves aggressively,regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

ConceptThe engine oil level is monitored electroni-cally while driving and can be shown on theControl Display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-sible operating range, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates thatthe engine oil pressure is too low.

Seite 279

Engine oil MOBILITY


Functional requirementsA current measured value is available afterapprox. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil levelVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


The engine oil level is displayed.

System limitsWhen making frequent short-distance tripsor using a dynamic driving style, it may notbe possible to calculate a measured value.In this case, the measured value for the last,sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

ConceptThe engine oil level is checked when the ve-hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-sible operating range, a Check Control mes-sage is displayed.

General informationDuring the measurement, the idle speed isincreased somewhat.

Functional requirements– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

– Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-als not depressed.

– Steptronic transmission: selector leverin selector lever position N or P and ac-celerator pedal not depressed.

– Engine is running and is at operatingtemperature.

Performing a detailed measurementVia the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"


4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis-played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General informationOnly add engine oil when the message isdisplayed in the instrument cluster. Thequantity to be added is indicated in themessage displayed in the instrument clus-ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, referto page 281.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off theignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating materials, for instance oils,greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Follow the instructionson the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-rials into different bottles. Store operatingmaterials out of reach of children.

Seite 280

MOBILITY Engine oil


NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causesengine damage. There is a risk of damageto property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-gine or the catalytic converter. There is arisk of damage to property. Do not add toomuch engine oil. When too much engineoil is added, have the engine oil level cor-rected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

OverviewThe oil filler neck is located in the enginecompartment, refer to page 276.

Adding engine oil1. Open the hood, refer to page 277.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the cap.

Engine oil types to add

General informationThe engine oil quality is critical for the lifeof the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which arelisted.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-tions in the engine or damage it. There is arisk of damage to property. When select-ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-gine oil has the correct oil rating.

Suitable engine oil typesAdd engine oils that meet the following oilrating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

Alternative engine oil typesIf an engine oil suitable for continuous useis not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of anengine oil with the following oil rating canbe added:

Seite 281

Engine oil MOBILITY


Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity gradesWhen selecting an engine oil, make surethat the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable engine oilratings and viscosities of engine oils can berequested from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timelyfashion can cause increased engine wearand thus engine damage. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Do not exceed theservice data indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopchange the engine oil.

Seite 282

MOBILITY Engine oil


Coolant



General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Information aboutsuitable additives is available from a deal-er’s service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Safety information

WARNING

With the engine hot and the cooling sys-tem open, coolant can escape and lead toscalding. There is a risk of injury. Onlyopen the cooling system with the enginecooled down.

WARNING

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-tives can damage the engine. There is arisk of injury and risk of damage to prop-erty. Do not allow additives to come into

contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

CheckingThere are yellow Min and Max marks in thecoolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoirslightly counterclockwise to allow anyexcess pressure to dissipate, then openit.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-tween the minimum and maximummarks in the filler neck.

Seite 283

Coolant MOBILITY


Adding1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoirslightly counterclockwise to allow anyexcess pressure to dissipate, then openit.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolantup to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Close the cap.

6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ-mental protection regulations whendisposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 284

MOBILITY Coolant


Maintenance



MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system indicates requiredmaintenance measures, and thereby pro-vides support in maintaining road safetyand the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of themaintenance system may vary according tothe country version. Replacement work,spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wearmaterials are calculated separately. Furtherinformation is available from a dealer’s serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

ConceptSensors and special algorithms take into ac-count the driving conditions of the vehicle.CBS uses these to calculate the need formaintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance corresponding toyour user profile.

General informationInformation on service requirements, referto page 144, can be displayed on the ControlDisplay.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control.The dealer’s service center can read thisdata out and suggest an optimized mainte-nance scope for the vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the re-mote control with which the vehicle wasdriven most recently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehiclebattery was disconnected are not taken intoaccount.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop update the time-dependent mainte-nance procedures, such as checking brakefluid and, if necessary, changing the engineoil and the microfilter/activated-charcoalfilter.

Service and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US modelsand Warranty and ServiceGuide Booklet for Canadianmodels

Please consult your Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet for US models andWarranty and Service Guide Booklet forCanadian models for additional informationon service requirements.

Seite 285

Maintenance MOBILITY


The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that maintenance and repair be per-formed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop. Records of regular maintenance andrepair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-nosis

General informationDevices connected to the OBD socket trig-ger the alarm system when the vehicle islocked. Remove any devices connected atthe OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-tricate component intended to be used inconjunction with specialized equipment tocheck the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-tem. Improper use of the socket for On-board Diagnosis, or contact with thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis for otherthan its intended purpose, can cause vehi-cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-sonal and property damage. Given the fore-going, the manufacture of your vehiclestrongly recommends that access to thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited toa dealer's service center or another quali-fied service center or repair shop or otherpersons that have the specialized trainingand equipment for purposes of properlyutilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's sidefor checking the primary components in thevehicle's emissions.

Emissions– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.Have the vehicle checked as soonas possible.

– The warning light flashes under certaincircumstances:

This indicates that there is excessivemisfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a briefperiod can seriously damage emissioncontrol components, in particular thecatalytic converter.

Seite 286

MOBILITY Maintenance


Replacing components



Onboard vehicle tool kit

The bag containing the onboard vehicle toolkit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboardvehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if thewiper falls onto it without the wiper bladeinstalled. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Hold the wiper firmly when

changing the wiper blade. Do not fold orswitch on the wiper without a wiper bladeinstalled.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed whenthe hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before openingthe hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing outthe wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiperblade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Seite 287

Replacing components MOBILITY


Rear wiper blade1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiperarm.

3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiperblade must engage audibly.

4. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbsLights and bulbs make an essential contri-bution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-mends that you have appropriate work per-formed by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopif you are unfamiliar with it or if it has notbeen described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer topage 288.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emittingdiodes installed behind a cover as a lightsource. These light-emitting diodes are re-lated to conventional lasers and are offi-

cially designated as Class 1 light-emittingdiodes.

Follow the safety information, refer topage 288.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-tact with the bulbs can cause burns. Thereis a risk of injury. Only change bulbs afterthey have cooled off.

WARNING

Work on switched-on lighting systems cancause short circuits. There is a risk of in-jury or risk of damage to property. Whenworking on the lighting system, switch offthe lights in question. If necessary, heedthe bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.There is a risk of damage to property. Donot hold new bulbs with your bare hands.Use a clean cloth or something similar, orhold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

WARNING

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-age the retina of the eye. There is a risk ofinjury. Do not look directly into the head-lights or other light sources. Do not re-move the LED covers.

Seite 288

MOBILITY Replacing components


Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of theheadlight glass in cool or humid weather.When driving with the lights switched on,the condensation evaporates after a shorttime. The headlight glass does not need tobe changed.

If despite driving with the headlightsswitched on, increasing humidity forms, forinstance water droplets in the light, havethe headlights checked.

Headlight settingThe headlight adjustments can be affectedby changing lights and bulbs. After theheadlight adjustment was changed, have itchecked and, if necessary, corrected by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulbreplacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams

2 Low beams

3 Turn signal

Bug light

1 Parking lights

2 Daytime running lights

3 Fog lights

High beamsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

Bulbs: H7

1. Open the hood, refer to page 277.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-move.

Seite 289



3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pullit out of the headlight toward the rear,arrow 2.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb with the bulbholder in reverse order of removal. Indoing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-rectly positioned in the headlight hous-ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-gages.

6. Check the position of the bulb throughthe headlight glass.

7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.Make sure that the lid engages.

Low beamsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

Bulbs: H7

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. – On the left facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover clockwise andremove it.

– On the right facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-wise, and remove it.

4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, andpull it downward out of the headlight,arrow 2.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

6. Install the new bulb with the bulbholder in reverse order of removal. Indoing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-rectly positioned in the headlight hous-ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-gages.

Seite 290



7. Check the position of the bulb throughthe headlight glass.

8. Install the covers. Make sure that thecovers engage.

Turn signalFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

Bulbs: PWY24W

1. Turn the steering wheel.

2. – On the left facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover clockwise andremove it.

– On the right facing the driving direc-tion: turn the cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-wise, and remove it.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

5. Press the bulb gently into the bulbholder, turn counterclockwise and re-move.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov-ers in the reverse order. Make sure thatthe covers engage.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytimerunning lightsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

Bulbs:

– Parking lights: W5W

– Daytime running light: PSX24W.

– Fog light: H8.

Seite 291



Replacing the bulbs

1. Pull the cover forward out of thebumper.

2. Remove the screws and take out thefront light.

3. Remove the bulb holder.

– Parking lights: turn the bulb holder,arrow 1, counterclockwise and re-move.

– Daytime running lights: squeeze theupper and lower locks of the bulb, ar-row 2, and remove the bulb.

For better accessibility, remove thebulb of the fog light as needed.

– Fog lights: turn the bulb, arrow 3,counterclockwise and remove it.

4. – Parking lights: pull the bulb out ofthe fixture.

– Fog lights and daytime runninglights: disconnect the bulb from thecable.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the coverin the reverse order.

The daytime running lights bulb holderengages audibly, first below, then above.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General informationThe following lights feature LED technol-ogy:

– Daytime running lights

– High beams

– Low beams

– Cornering light

– Parking lights

– Fog lights

In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-er’s service center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Seite 292



Overview

Position of the headlights

1 Turn signal

2 Daytime running lights

3 Low beams/high beams

4 Cornering light

LED bug light

1 Parking lights

2 Fog lights

Turn signalFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

Bulbs: PWY24W.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 277.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-move.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulbholder, turn counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the coverin the reverse order.

Seite 293



Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights

2 Center brake light

3 License plate light

Side tail lights

1 Brake lights/tail lights

2 Turn signal

3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lights

1 Brake light

2 Tail lights

3 Turn signal

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lightsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

– Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:P21W

– Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W

– Bulb, turn signal: P21W

– Bulb, reversing lights: P21W

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plugconnector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Seite 294



Press the latches together, arrows 1, andremove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently intothe socket, turn counterclockwise andremove.

– Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights

– Arrow 2: turn signal

– Arrow 3: reversing light

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insertthe new bulb and attach the bulb holder.Make sure that the bulb holder engagesin all fasteners.

Central brake light and license platelightsFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

The lights feature LED technology. In thecase of a malfunction, contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacementFollow the general instructions on lightsand bulbs, refer to page 288.

Bulb: WY5W

1. Push the side turn signal forward in thedriving direction, arrow 1, and swing itoutward, arrow 2.

2. – On the left facing the driving direc-tion: turn the bulb holder clockwiseand remove.

– On the right facing the driving direc-tion: turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise and remove.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1,and swing it forward, arrow 2.

Vehicle battery

MaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free.

Seite 295



The added amount of acid is sufficient forthe service life of the battery.

More information about the battery can berequested from a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repairshop.

Replacing the vehicle battery

General informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle recom-mends that you have a dealer’s service cen-ter or another qualified service center or re-pair shop register the vehicle battery to thevehicle after the battery has been replaced.Once the battery has been registered again,all comfort features will be available with-out restriction and any Check Control mes-sages displayed which relate to comfort fea-tures will disappear.

Safety information

NOTICE

Vehicle batteries that are not compatiblecan damage vehicle systems and impairvehicle functions. There is a risk of per-sonal and property damage. Only vehiclebatteries that are compatible with your ve-hicle type should be installed in your vehi-cle. Information on compatible vehicle bat-teries is available at your dealer’s servicecenter.

Charging the battery

General informationMake sure that the battery is always suffi-ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated bya red indicator light.

The battery may need to be charged in thefollowing cases:

– When making frequent short-distancedrives.

– If the vehicle is not used for more than amonth.

– Steptronic transmission: when parkedfor long periods of time in selector leverposition D, R or N.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle batterycan work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-boardnetwork can be overloaded or damaged.There is a risk of damage to property. Onlyconnect battery chargers for the vehiclebattery to the starting aid terminals in theengine compartment.

Starting aid terminalsIn the vehicle, only charge the battery viathe starting aid terminals, refer topage 301, in the engine compartment withthe engine off.

Power failureAfter a power loss, some equipment needsto be newly initialized or individual settingsupdated, for example:

– Time: update.

– Date: update.

– Seat and mirror memory: store the posi-tions again.

– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Seite 296



Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the battery in an upright positionfor transport and storage. Secure the batteryso that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

WARNING

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overloadelectrical lines and components. There is arisk of fire. Never attempt to repair ablown fuse. Do not replace a nonworkingfuse with a substitute of another color oramperage rating.

Accessing the fusesThe fuses are located in the glove compart-ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations,as well as the positions of any other fuseboxes, is found on a separate sheet in thefuse box.

Replacing fusesThe vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer's service center or an-other qualified service center or repair shopreplace the fuses.

Seite 297



Breakdown assistance



Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-play.

The red light in the button flashes when thehazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail-gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General informationSome of the articles have a limited servicelife.

Check the expiration dates of the contentsregularly and replace any expired itemspromptly.

StorageThe first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

ConceptMINI Roadside Assistance can be contactedif assistance is needed in the event of abreakdown.

Seite 298

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance


General informationIn the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-hicle's condition is sent directly to the man-ufacturer of your vehicle.

Contact can also be made via a Check Con-trol message, refer to page 138.

Starting Roadside AssistanceIf the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,support is offered through Teleservice Diag-nosis.


1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistanceof the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, ifneeded. Select to dial the telephonenumber on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice DiagnosisTeleservice Diagnosis enables the wirelesstransmission of detailed vehicle data that isimportant for vehicle diagnosis. This data istransmitted automatically.

Starting Teleservice HelpDepending on the country, the TeleserviceHelp enables a more in-depth diagnosis ofthe vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re-questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.


3. Control Display is switched on.

4. "Teleservice Help"

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures willbe initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-tance will be informed.

Intelligent emergency call

ConceptIn case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-quest can be made through the system.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-ble conditions.

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements– The ignition is switched on.

– The Assist system is functional.

– The SIM card integrated in the vehiclehas been activated.

Initiating an Emergency RequestautomaticallyUnder certain conditions, for instance if theairbags trigger, an Emergency Request isautomatically initiated immediately after anaccident of corresponding severity. Auto-

Seite 299

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY


matic Collision Notification is not affectedby pressing the SOS button.

Initiating an Emergency Requestmanually1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED atthe button lights up green.

– The LED is illuminated green when anEmergency Request has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-cle until the voice connection has beenestablished.

– The LED flashes green when a connec-tion to the MINI Response Center hasbeen established.

The MINI Response Center then makescontact with you and takes further stepsto help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, theMINI Response Center can take furthersteps to help you under certain circum-stances.

For this, data is transmitted to the MINIResponse Center which serve to deter-mine the necessary rescue measures.E.g., the current position of the vehicle,if it can be established.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-sponse Center through the loudspeakers,the hands-free system, for instance, maybe broken. However, the MINI ResponseCenter may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-gency Request.

Jump-starting

General informationIf the battery is discharged, the engine canbe started using the battery of another vehi-

cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumpercables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead toan electric shock. There is a risk of inju-ries or danger to life. Do not touch anycomponents that are under voltage.

WARNING

If the jumper cables are connected in theincorrect order, sparking may occur. Thereis a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between thetwo vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Make sure that no bodycontact occurs.

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. Thevoltage information can be found on thebattery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assistingvehicle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Seite 300



Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com-partment acts as the battery's positive ter-minal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

A special connection on the body acts as thebattery negative terminal.

Connecting the cablesTo prevent personal injury or damage toboth vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-tive jumper cable to the positive termi-nal of the battery, or to the correspond-ing starting aid terminal of the vehicleproviding assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the otherend of the cable to the positive terminalof the battery, or to the corresponding

starting aid terminal of the vehicle to bestarted.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-tive jumper cable to the negative termi-nal of the battery, or to the correspond-ing engine or body ground of assistingvehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or tothe corresponding engine or bodyground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicleand let it run for several minutes at anincreased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is tobe started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not suc-cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-ing another attempt in order to allow thedischarged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several mi-nutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

WARNING


Seite 301



Steptronic transmission withdriven front axle: transporting thevehicle

General informationThe vehicle must not be towed if the frontwheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towingthe vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There isa risk of damage to property. Have vehicletransported only with lifted front axle oron a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicleTo remove a broken-down vehicle from thedanger area, it can be pushed for a shortdistance.

Roll or push, refer to page 131, the vehicle.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with atow truck with a so-called lift bar or on aflat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged whenlifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by itstow fitting, body parts, or suspensionparts.

Steptronic transmission with ALL4:transporting the vehicle

General informationThe vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Pushing the vehicleTo remove a broken-down vehicle from thedanger area, it can be pushed for a shortdistance.


Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on aloading platform.

NOTICE





Seite 302



Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicleA broken-down vehicle can be towed orpushed.


NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brakeis not possible, the vehicle cannot bemoved or towed. There is a risk of damageto property. The vehicle should only betransported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

– Make sure that the ignition is switchedon; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights,turn signals, and wipers may be unavail-able.

– Do not tow the vehicle with the rearaxle tilted, as the front wheels couldturn.

– When the engine is stopped, there is nopower assist. Consequently, more forceneeds to be applied when braking andsteering.

– Larger steering wheel movements arerequired.

– The towing vehicle must not be lighterthan the vehicle being towed; otherwise,it will not be possible to control the ve-hicle's response.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Have your vehicle transported with a towtruck with a so-called lift bar or on a flatbed.

NOTICE





With ALL4

Have your vehicle transported on a flatbedsurface only

Seite 303



NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towingthe vehicle with a single lifted axle. Thereis a risk of damage to property. The vehi-cle should only be transported on a loadingplatform.

NOTICE





Towing other vehicles

General informationSwitch on the hazard warning system, de-pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-dow.

Safety information

WARNING

If the approved gross vehicle weight of thetowing vehicle is lighter than the vehicleto be towed, the tow fitting can tear off orit will not be possible to control the vehi-cle's response. There is a risk of an acci-dent. Make sure that the gross vehicleweight of the towing vehicle is heavierthan the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-correctly, damage to other vehicle partscan occur. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Correctly attach the tow bar ortow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-low the following:

– Maneuvering capability is limited goingaround corners.

– The tow bar will generate lateral forcesif it is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, makesure that the tow rope is taut.

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enablethe vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always becarried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at thefront or rear of the vehicle.

Seite 304



The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle toolkit, refer to page 287, are together in thecargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

– Use only the tow fitting provided withthe vehicle and screw it all the way in.

– Use the tow fitting for towing on pavedroads only.

– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,for instance do not lift the vehicle by thetow fitting.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended,there may be damage to the vehicle or tothe tow fitting. There is a risk of damageto property. Follow the notes on using thetow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-cated in the front and rear of the vehicle onthe right side with respect to the directionof travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the coverto push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible dueto the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficultiescorrected by a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Manual transmissionIf possible, do not tow-start the vehicle butstart the engine by jump-starting, refer topage 300. If the vehicle is equipped with acatalytic converter, only tow-start while theengine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning systemand comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer topage 112.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with theclutch pedal pressed and slowly releasethe pedal. After the engine starts, imme-diately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove thetow bar or rope, and switch off the haz-ard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified serv-ice center or repair shop.

Seite 305



Care



Washing the vehicle

General informationRegularly remove foreign objects such asleaves in the area below the windshieldwhen the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularlyin winter. Intense soiling and road salt candamage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressurewashers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash-ers, components can be damaged due tothe pressure or temperatures being toohigh. There is a risk of damage to property.Maintain sufficient distance and do notspray too long continuously. Follow theoperating instructions for the high-pres-sure washer.

Distances and temperature– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.

– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic vehicle washescan cause damage to the vehicle. There isa risk of damage to property. Follow thefollowing instructions:

– Give preference to cloth vehiclewashes or those that use soft brushesin order to avoid paint damage.

– Avoid vehicle washes with guide railshigher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid dam-age to the chassis.

– Observe the tire width of the guiderail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-age to the exterior mirrors.

– With rod antenna: unscrew the rodantenna to avoid rod antenna break-age.

– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-sary, rain sensor to avoid damage tothe wiper system.

Driving into a vehicle wash with amanual transmissionIn vehicle washes, the vehicle must be ableto roll freely.

Seite 306

MOBILITY Care


Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 128.

Driving into a vehicle wash with aSteptronic transmissionIn vehicle washes, the vehicle must be ableto roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer topage 131.

Some vehicle washes do not permit personsin the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be lockedfrom the outside when in selector lever po-sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a vehicle washEnsure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 113.

HeadlightsDo not rub wet headlights dry and do notuse abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-stance from insects, with shampoo andwash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-tion can be reduced. The heat generatedduring braking dries brake discs and brakepads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win-dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises andwiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General informationMINI recommends using vehicle care andcleaning products from MINI. Suitable careproducts are available from a dealer’s serv-ice center or another qualified service cen-ter or repair shop.

Safety information

WARNING

Cleansers can contain substances that aredangerous and harmful to your health.There is a risk of injury. When cleaningthe interior, open the doors or windows.Only use products intended for cleaningvehicles. Follow the instructions on thecontainer.

Vehicle paint

General informationRegular care contributes to driving safetyand value retention. Environmental influen-ces in areas with elevated air pollution ornatural contaminants, such as tree resin orpollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-hicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-moved immediately to prevent the finishfrom being altered or discolored.

Seite 307

Care MOBILITY


Safety information

WARNING

Improperly performed work on the vehiclepaint can lead to a failure or malfunctionof the radar sensors and thereby result in asafety risk. There is a risk of accidents orrisk of damage to property. Have paint-work or paintwork repairs on bumpers ofvehicles with radar sensors performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop only.

Matte finishOnly use cleaning and care products suita-ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather regularly, us-ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-creased wear and premature degradation ofthe leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, clean leather and provide leathercare roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequentlybecause soiling on such surfaces is substan-tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirtand grease will gradually break down theprotective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General informationVacuum the upholstery regularly with avacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance withbeverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbingthe material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles ofclothing can damage the seat covers.There is a risk of damage to property. En-sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents orsteam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaningagents can destroy the protective layer ofadjacent components, such as the brakedisc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly todry them. The heat generated during brak-ing dries brake discs and brake pads andprotects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the ra-diator grille or door handles with an amplesupply of water, possibly with shampooadded, particularly when they have been ex-posed to road salt.

Rubber componentsEnvironmental influences can cause surfacesoiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.Use only water and suitable cleaning agentsfor cleaning.

Seite 308

MOBILITY Care


Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-ber care agents at regular intervals. Whencleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-con-containing vehicle care products in or-der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood com-ponents only with a moist rag. Then drywith a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such, can damageplastic parts. There is a risk of damage toproperty. Clean with a microfiber cloth.Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Plastic components are e.g.:

– Imitation leather surfaces.

– Roofliner.

– Light lenses.

– Instrument cluster cover.

– Matt black spray-coated components.

– Painted parts in the car's interior.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

WARNING

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safetybelt webbing. Missing protective effect ofthe safety belts. There is a risk of injuriesor danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling actionand thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with thesafety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re-tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limitthe pedal distance or block a depressedpedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stowobjects in the vehicle such that they aresecured and cannot enter into the driver'sfloor area. Use floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle and can be safely attachedto the floor. Do not use loose floor matsand do not layer several floor mats. Makesure that there is sufficient clearance forthe pedals. Ensure that the floor mats aresecurely fastened again after they were re-moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car'sinterior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean witha microfiber cloth and water or a textilecleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,rub back and forth in the direction of travelonly.

Sensor/camera lensesTo clean sensors and camera lenses, use acloth moistened with a small amount ofglass detergent.

Seite 309

Care MOBILITY


Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids ofany kind can damage the surface of dis-plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damagedwith improper cleaning. There is a risk ofdamage to property. Avoid pressure that istoo high and do not use any scratchingmaterials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfibercloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lensof the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-fer to page 152.

Long-term vehicle storageWhen the vehicle is shut down for longerthan three months, special measures mustbe taken. Further information is availablefrom a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 310

MOBILITY Care


Seite 311

Care MOBILITY


312


REFERENCE

Technical data ......................................................................................... 314Appendix .................................................................................................. 317Everything from A to Z ........................................................................ 318


Technical data




General information

The technical data and specifications in thisOwner's Manual are used as guidance val-ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviatefrom this, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment, country version or coun-try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu-ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-tained from a dealer’s service center or an-other qualified service center or repairshop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-spe-cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac-count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights candeviate, for instance due to the selectedspecial equipment, tires, load and chassisversion.

MINI Countryman

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.9/2,005

Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,822

Height inches/mm 61.3/1,557

Length inches/mm 169.8/4,314

Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4

Seite 314

REFERENCE Technical data


Weights

MINI Cooper Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,321/1,960

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,376/1,985

Load lbs/kg 860/390

Approved front axle load



Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,183/990

MINI Cooper S Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,542/2,060

Load lbs/kg 926/420

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000

MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4




Load lbs/kg 860/390





Seite 315

Technical data REFERENCE


MINI Cooper S Countryman ALL4




Load lbs/kg 926/420





MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4




Load lbs/kg 926/420





Capacities

MINI Countryman US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 16.1/61.0 Fuel quality, refer topage 254.

Seite 316

REFERENCE Technical data


Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of thevehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

These chapters of the printed Owner'sManual contain updates made after the edi-torial deadline:

– Information: Data storage, refer topage 12.

Seite 317

Appendix REFERENCE


Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS, Antilock Brake System 184 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con-

trol 135 Accessories and parts 10 ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 189 Activated-charcoal filter 215 Activation times, parked-car ventila-

tion 216 Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 189 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 174 Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-

play 181 Adaptive chassis 186 Additives, engine oil types 281 Adjustments, steering wheel 105 After washing vehicle 307 Airbags 163 Airbags, indicator and warning light 165 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 210, 214 Air conditioner 209 Air conditioning 210, 213 Air, dehumidifying, see Air condition-

ing 210, 213 Air distribution, manual 211, 215 Air flow, air conditioner 211 Air flow, automatic climate control 214 Air pressure, tires 256 Air vents, see Ventilation 215 Alarm system 87 Alarm triggering 87 Alarm, unintentional 88 Alertness assistant 182 ALL4 186 All-season tires, see Winter tires 264 All-wheel drive, see ALL4 186 Antifreeze, washer fluid 126

Antilock Brake System, ABS 184 Anti-slip control, see DSC 184 Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 271 Approach control warning with city light

braking function 175 Approved axle load 315 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Arrival time 149 Ash tray 222 Assistance when driving off 187 AUTO intensity 214 Automatic climate control 212 Automatic Curb Monitor 104 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 165 Automatic headlight control 158 Automatic locking 86 Automatic recirculated-air control 214 Automatic transmission with Step-

tronic 128 Automatic unlocking 87 Automatic vehicle wash 306 AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 213 AUTO program, intensity 214 Auto Start/Stop function 115 Auto washing 306 Average fuel consumption 148 Average speed 149 Axle loads, weights 315

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup-port 95, 96

Backrest, seats 94 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 298 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 296 Battery, vehicle 295

Seite 318

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z


Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-ing 301

Belts, safety belts 98 Beverage holder, cup holder 226 Blocking, power window 90 Bluetooth connection 59 Bonus range, GREEN Mode 246 Bottle holder, see Cup holder 226 Brake assistant 184 Brake discs, break-in 238 Brake force display 181 Brake lights, brake force display 181 Brake pads, break-in 238 Braking, information 240 Breakdown assistance 298 Break-in 238 Brightness of Control Display 56 Bug light 289 Bulb replacement 288 Bulb replacement, front 289, 292 Bulb replacement, rear 294 Bulb replacement, side 295 Bulbs and lights 288 Button, SOS 299 Button, Start/Stop 112 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 300

C

Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-tion, Entertainment, Communication 8

California Proposition 65 Warning 10 Calling up mirror adjustment 86 Calling up seat adjustment 86 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 174 Camera-based cruise control 189 Camera lenses, care 309 Camera, rearview camera 202 Can holder, see Cup holder 226 Care, displays 310 Care, vehicle 307 Care, washing the vehicle 306 Cargo area 228 Cargo area, adapting size 232 Cargo area, enlarging 230

Cargo area lid 80 Cargo area, loading 229 Cargo area, seating surface 234 Cargo area, storage compartments 230 Cargo cover 229 Cargo position, rear seat backrest 230 Cargo, stowing and securing 229 Cargo straps 229 Carpet, care 309 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 239 CBS Condition Based Service 285 Center armrest 226 Center console 40 Central Information Display (CID) 42 Central Information Display (CID) operating

concept 42 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 151 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 75 Central screen, see Control Display 44 Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9 Changing parts 287 Changing wheels 270 Changing wheels/tires 263 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 15 Check Control 138 Checking the oil level electronically 279 Children, seating position 107 Children, transporting safely 107 Child restraint system 107 Child restraint system LATCH 109 Child restraint systems, mounting 108 Child safety locks 111 Child seat, mounting 108 Child seats 107 Chrome parts, care 308 Cigarette lighter 222 Cleaning, displays 310 Climate control 209, 212 Clothes hooks 227 Coasting 247 Coasting with engine decoupled, coast-

ing 247

Seite 319

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE


Coasting with idling engine 247 Combination switch, see Turn signals 119 Combi switch, see Wiper system 120, 123 Comfort Access 76 Compartments in the doors 226 Compass 220 Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 59 Compressor 265 Computer, see Onboard Computer 147 Condensation on windows 215 Condensation under the vehicle 241 Condition Based Service CBS 285 Configuring driving program 187 Confirmation signal 87 Connecting device 58 Connecting mobile phone 58 Connecting smartphone 58 Connecting telephone 58 Connections 58 Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 144 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Continued driving with a flat tire 170, 173 Control Display 44 Control Display, settings 54 Controller 45 Controller operation 46 Control systems, driving stability 184 Convenient closing 72 Convenient opening 71 Coolant 283 Cooling, maximum 213 Cooling system 283 Cornering light 159 Corrosion on brake discs 241 Cosmetic mirror 222 Country timer 155 Coupling, see Pairing 58 Courtesy lights during unlocking 71 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 72 Cruise control 196 Cruise control, active 189 Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 189

Cruise control without distance control, seeCruise control 196

Cruising range 143 Cup holder 226 Current consumption 144

D

Damage, tires 262 Data memory 12 Data protection, settings 57 Data, technical 314, 316 Date 55 Date display 143 Daytime running lights 159 DCC, see Cruise control 196 Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-

dows 211 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 215 Defrosting the windows 211 Dehumidifying, air 210, 213 Deleting personal data 57 Deletion of personal data 57 Destination distance 149 Device list 58 Digital clock 143 Digital compass 220 Dimensions 314 Dimmable exterior mirrors 104 Dimmable interior mirror 105 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 119 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 138 Display, engine temperature 149 Display, GREEN Mode 244 Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 161 Displays 137 Displays, care 310 Disposal, coolant 284 Disposal, vehicle battery 297 Distance control, see PDC 198 Distance to destination 149 Divided screen view, split screen 43 Drive-off assistant 187 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 184

Seite 320



Driver assistance, see IntelligentSafety 174

Driver profiles 83 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 85 Driver profiles, importing profiles 85 Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 186 Driving Excitement, SPORT 150 Driving instructions, break-in 238 Driving mode, GREEN 244 Driving mode, GREEN driving style analy-

sis 248 Driving modes 186 Driving notes, general 239 Driving on poor roads 241 Driving on racetracks 242 Driving stability control systems 184 Driving style analysis 248 Driving tip, GREEN tip 246 Driving tips 239 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 184 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 185 DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas-

sis 186 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 184 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 185

E

Easy Opener 78 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 138 Electronic oil measurement 279 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 184 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 253 Emergency Request 299 Emergency service, see Breakdown assis-

tance 298 Emergency unlocking, transmission

lock 135 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see

Emergency wheel 274

Energy control 144 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 115 Engine, automatic switch-off 115 Engine compartment 276 Engine compartment, working in 277 Engine coolant 283 Engine idling when driving, coasting 247 Engine oil 279 Engine oil, adding 280 Engine oil change 282 Engine oil filler neck 280 Engine oil types to add 281 Engine start, jump-starting 300 Engine start, see Starting the engine 113 Engine stop 114 Engine temperature, display 149 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication 8

Entering an address, navigation, see Own-er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication 8

Entering a vehicle wash 306 Equipment, interior 218 Error displays, see Check Control 138 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 184 Exchanging wheels/tires 263 Exhaust gas system 239 Exiting a vehicle wash 306 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 104 Exterior mirrors 103 Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 104 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 104 External start 300 External temperature display 143 External temperature warning 143 Eyes for securing cargo 229

F

Failure message, see Check Control 138 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 88 Fan, see Air flow 211, 214

Seite 321



Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 98 Filler neck for engine oil 280 Finding charging stations, see Charging sta-

tions and points of interest, see Owner'sHandbook for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Fine wood, care 309 First-aid kit 298 Fish, MINIMALISM display 248 Flat tire, changing wheels 270 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 172 Flat tire, repairing 265 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 167 Flat tire, warning light 168, 172 Flooding 239 Floor carpet, care 309 Floor mats, care 309 Fogged up windows 211 Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 122, 126 Fold back rear seat backrests 230 Foot brake 240 For Your Own Safety 9 Front airbags 163 Front fog lights 160 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 165 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 166 Front seats 94 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 172 Fuel 254 Fuel cap 252 Fuel consumption, see Average fuel con-

sumption 148 Fuel filler flap 252 Fuel gauge 142 Fuel quality 254 Fuel recommendation 254 Fuel, tank capacity 316 Fuse 297

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-sal Remote Control 218

Gasoline 254 Gear shift indicator 145 General driving notes 239 General settings 54 Glare shield 222 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 93 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 91 Glove compartment 225 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 55 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-tion 8

GREEN bonus range 246 GREEN Mode 244 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 186 GREEN tip, driving tip 246 Gross vehicle weight, approved 315 Ground clearance 241

H

Halogen headlights 289 Handbrake, see Parking brake 117 Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 219 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-cation 8

Hazard warning flashers 298 Head airbag 164 Headlight control, automatic 158 Headlight courtesy delay feature 158 Headlight flasher 120 Headlight glass 289 Headlights, care 307 Head restraints, front 100 Head restraints, rear 101 Head-up Display 152 Head-up Display, see Memory function 102 Head-up Display, shift point indicator 155 Head-up Display, sport displays 154 Head-up Display, standard view 153 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 229 High-beam Assistant 159 High beams 120

Seite 322



High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-sistant 159

Hills 240 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 187 Holder for beverages 226 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 218 Homepage 8 Hood 277 Horn 38 Hot exhaust gas system 239 Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 HUD Head-up Display 152 Hydroplaning 239

I

Ice warning, see External temperaturewarning 143

Icy roads, see External temperature warn-ing 143

Identification marks, tires 260 Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 15 Ignition off 112 Ignition on 112 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 151 Indication of a flat tire 168, 172 Indicator light, see Check Control 138 Individual air distribution 211, 215 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 83 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray, see Owner'sManual for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Inflation pressure, tires 256 Inflation pressure warning, tires 172 Info Display, see Onboard Computer 147 Information 8 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 168 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 172 Instrument cluster 137 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 138

Instrument lighting 161 Integrated key 74 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-

cle 66 Integrated Universal Remote Control 218 Intelligent emergency call 299 Intelligent Safety 174 Intended use 10 Intensity, AUTO program 214 Interior equipment 218 Interior lights 161 Interior lights during unlocking 71 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 72 Interior mirror 103 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 105 Interior mirror, compass 220 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 105 Interior motion sensor 88 Internet site 8 Interval display, service requirements 144 Interval mode 121, 124 In the vicinity of the center console 40 In the vicinity of the roofliner 41 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 38 IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle 66

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 272 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 92 Jam protection system, windows 90 Jump-starting 300

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 76 Key, see Integrated key 74 Key, see Remote control 70 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 132 Knee airbag 164

Seite 323



L

Label on recommended tires 263 Label, runflat tires 264 Language, on the Control Display 54 Lashing eyes 229 LATCH child restraint fixing system 109 Launch Control 135 Leather, care 308 LED ring, central instrument cluster 151 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 288 Letters and numbers, entering 47 Light 157 Light-alloy wheels, care 308 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 288 Lighter 222 Lighting 157 Light replacement 288 Light replacement, front 289, 292 Light replacement, rear 294 Light replacement, side 295 Lights and bulbs 288 Light switch 157 List of all messages 56 Load 229 Loading 228 Loading position 230 Location, vehicle position 55 Locking, automatic 86 Locking, from inside 75 Locking, settings 86 Low beams 157 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 159 Lower back support 96 Lower back support, mechanical 95 Lug bolt lock 271 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 241 Lumbar support 96 Lumbar support, mechanical 95

M

Maintenance 285

Maintenance requirements 285 Maintenance, service requirements 144 Maintenance system, MINI 285 Make-up mirror 222 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 138 Manual air distribution 211, 215 Manual air flow 211, 214 Manual brake, see Parking brake 117 Manual mode, transmission 132 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 253 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 199 Manual operation, rearview camera 202 Manual transmission 127 Manufacturer of the MINI 9 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Matte finish 308 Maximum cooling 213 Maximum speed, display 145 Maximum speed, winter tires 264 Measurement, units of 55 Mechanical key 74 Medical kit 298 Memory function 102 Menu in instrument cluster 147 Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 46 Messages 56 Messages, see Check Control 138 Microfilter 211, 215 MID - program, driving dynamics 186 MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for


MINI driving modes 186 MINI logo projection during unlocking 71 MINI maintenance system 285 MINIMALISM analyzer 248 MINIMALISM information 247 Minimum tread, tires 262 MINI Picnic Bench 234 Mirrors 103 Mirror, see Memory function 102

Seite 324



Mobile communication devices in the vehi-cle 239

Mobility System 265 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9 Moisture in headlight 289 Monitor, see Control Display 44 Mounting of child restraint systems 108 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-munication 8

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 38 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for


N

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-tion, Entertainment and Communication 8

Neck restraints, front, see Head re-straints 100

Neck restraints, rear, see Head re-straints 101

Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 308 New wheels and tires 263 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 No-touch closing of the tailgate 78 No-touch opening of the tailgate 78

O

OBD Onboard Diagnostics 286 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 203 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 255 Odometer 142 Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 8 Oil 279 Oil, adding 280 Oil change 282

Oil change interval, service require-ments 144

Oil filler neck 280 Oil types to add, engine 281 Old batteries, disposal 297 Onboard Computer 147 Onboard Diagnostics OBD 286 Onboard literature, printed 66 Onboard vehicle tool kit 287 On-call service, see Breakdown assis-

tance 298 Opening and closing 70 Opening, from inside 75 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 42 Operation via the Controller 46 Operation via touchscreen 47 Optional equipment 9 Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air

control 214 Owner's Manual media 66 Owner's Manual, printed 66

P

Paint, vehicle 307 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 88 Panic mode 88 Panoramic glass sunroof 91 Parallel parking assistant 204 Park Distance Control PDC 198 Parked-car ventilation 216 Parked vehicle, condensation 241 Parking aid, see PDC 198 Parking assistant 204 Parking brake 117 Parking lights 157 Parts and accessories 10 Passenger's side mirror, tilting 104 Pathway lines, rearview camera 203 PDC Park Distance Control 198 Performance Control 186 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 83 Person warning with City light braking

function 179 Picnic Bench 234

Seite 325



Plastic, care 309 Poor roads, driving on 241 PostCrash — iBrake 183 Power failure 296 Power windows 89 Pressure, tires 256 Pressure warning, tires 172 Printed onboard literature 66 Profiles, see Driver profiles 83 Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 49 Protective function, glass sunroof 92 Protective function, windows 90 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 45

R

Racetrack operation 242 Radiator fluid 283 Radio-operated remote control, see Remote

control 70 Radio-ready state 113 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 8 Rain sensor 121, 124 Ratchet straps 229 Rear lights 294 Rear seats 97 Rearview camera 201 Rear window defroster 211, 215 Rear window wiper, operation 122, 125 Recirculated-air filter 215 Recirculated-air mode 210, 214 Recommended fuel grade 255 Recommended tire brands 263 Refueling 252 Remaining range 143 Remote control, additional 73 Remote control, loss 73 Remote control, malfunction 73 Remote control, opening/closing 70 Remote control, replacing the battery 73 Remote control, universal 218 Replacing parts 287 Replacing the battery, remote control 73 Replacing wheels/tires 263

Reporting safety malfunctions 15 RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise

control 189 RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 196 Reserve warning, see Range 143 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 168 Retreaded tires 263 Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis-

tance 298 Roadside parking lights 158 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 219 RON recommended fuel grade 255 Roofliner 41 Roof load capacity 315 Roof-mounted luggage rack 241 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook


RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflattires 264

Rubber components, care 308 Runflat tires 264

S

Safe braking 240 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 100 Safety belts 98 Safety belts, care 309 Safety locks, doors, and windows 111 Safety switch, windows 90 Safety systems, airbags 163 Saving fuel 243 Screen, see Control Display 44 Screwdriver 287 Sealant, see Mobility System 265 Seat heating, front 97 Seating position for children 107 Seat, see Memory function 102 Seats, front 94 Seats, rear 97 Securing cargo 229 Selection list in instrument cluster 147 Sensors, care 309 Service and warranty 11

Seite 326



Service requirements, Condition BasedService CBS 285

Service requirements, display 144 Servotronic 188 SET button, see Camera-based cruise con-

trol 189 SET button, see Cruise control 196 Settings, locking/unlocking 86 Settings, mirrors 103 Settings on the Control Display 54 Shift gate rotary switch 186 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 133 Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 155 Side airbag 163 Signaling, horn 38 Signals when unlocking 87 Sitting safely 94 Size 314 Slide/tilt glass roof 91 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

SMS text messages, supplementary 142 Snow chains 269 Socket 223 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 286 Software update 64 SOS button 299 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for


Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 274 Speed, average 149 Speed Limit Info 145 Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 149 Speed limits, display 145 Speed warning 151 Split screen 43 Sport displays 150 Sport displays, Head-up Display 154 SPORT program, driving dynamics 187 Sport program, transmission 132 Stability control systems 184 Standard equipment 9 Standard view, Head-up Display 153 Stars, MINIMALISM display 248

Start/stop, automatic function 115 Start/Stop button 112 Starting the engine 113 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook


Status control display, tires 167 Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 43 Status of Owner's Manual 9 Status, vehicle 156 Steering assistance 188 Steering wheel, adjusting 105 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-

tronic transmission 128 Steptronic Sport transmission with double

clutch, see Steptronic transmission 128 Steptronic transmission 128 Steptronic transmission with double clutch,

see Steptronic transmission 128 Stopping the engine 114 Storage compartments 225 Storage, tires 264 Storing the vehicle 310 Stowing and securing cargo 229 Suitable devices 59 Suitable mobile phones 59 Summer tires, tread 261 Sun visor 222 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 66 Supplementary SMS text messages 142 Switch for driving dynamics 186 Switch, see Cockpit 38 Symbols 8

T

Tachometer 142 Tailgate 80 Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa-

tion 78 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa-

tion 78 Tailgate via remote control 72 Tail lights 294

Seite 327



Technical changes, see For Your OwnSafety 9

Technical data 314, 316 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for


Temperature, air conditioner 210 Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 212 Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 143 Temperature, engine 149 Terminal, starting aid 301 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 87 Thigh support 97 Tilt alarm sensor 88 Tilting, passenger's side mirror 104 Time 54 Time of arrival 149 Tire damage 262 Tire identification marks 260 Tire inflation pressure 256 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see

FTM 172 Tire pressure 256 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 167 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 265 Tires, changing 263 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 265 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 256 Tires, runflat 264 Tire tread 261 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 8 Tools 287 Total vehicle weight 315 Touchpad 49 Touchscreen 47 Towing 301 Tow-starting 301 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 167 Traction control 185 TRACTION driving mode, driving dynam-

ics 185

Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook forNavigation, Entertainment, Communica-tion 8

Transmission lock, electronic unlock-ing 135

Transmission lock, releasing manually 134 Transmission, manual transmission 127 Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 128 Transporting children safely 107 Tread, tires 261 Trip computer 149 Triple turn signal activation 119 Trip odometer 142 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 142 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 203 Turn signal, front 289, 292 Turn signal, indicator light 141 Turn signal, side 295 Turn signals, operation 119 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 294

U

Unintentional alarm 88 Units of measurement 55 Universal remote control 218 Unlocking, automatic 87 Unlocking, settings 86 Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 Upholstery care 308 USB connection 61 USB interface, position in vehicle 224 USB port, see USB interface 224 Use, intended 10 Using a smartphone via voice activation 51

V

Vanity mirror 222 Vehicle battery 295 Vehicle battery, replacing 296 Vehicle, break-in 238 Vehicle care 307 Vehicle care products 307

Seite 328



Vehicle features and options 9 Vehicle identification number 15 Vehicle jack 272 Vehicle key, see Remote control 70 Vehicle paint 307 Vehicle position, vehicle location 55 Vehicle status 156 Vehicle storage 310 Vehicle wash 306 Vehicle, washing 306 Ventilation 215 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 216 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15 Voice activation system 51 Voice command response, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

W

Warning and indicator lights, see CheckControl 138

Warning displays, see Check Control 138 Warning messages, see Check Control 138 Warning triangle 298 Warranty 10 Washer fluid 126 Washer nozzles, windshield 122, 125 Washing the vehicle 306 Water on roads 239 Weights 315 Welcome lights 158 Welcome lights during unlocking 71 Wheel cleaner 308 Wheels, changing 263 Wheels, everything on wheels and

tires 256 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 172 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 167 Window defroster, rear 211, 215 Windows, powered 89 Windshield cleaning system 120, 123 Windshield defroster 211, 215 Windshield washer fluid 126 Windshield washer nozzles 122, 125

Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-tion 122, 126

Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-tem 120, 123

Winter storage, care 310 Winter tires, suitable tires 264 Winter tires, tread 262 Wiper blades, replacing 287 Wiper fluid 126 Wiper system 120, 123 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see

Wireless charging tray, see Owner'sManual for Navigation, Entertainment,Communication 8

Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manualfor Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-cation 8

Wood, care 309 Word match concept, navigation 42 Wrench 287

Seite 329



01402723835 ue

*BL272383500A*

California Proposition 65Warning

Online Version für Sach-Nr. 0140 - II/19

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01402723835 ue

*BL272383500A*


Documents

MINI COUNTRYMAN. OWNER'S MANUAL....Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the ap-pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. For Your Own Safety Manufacturer